Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 214

‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬


‫ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻻﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺴﺒﺔ‬


‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ‬

‫‪Rev.0‬‬ ‫‪SEP, 2022‬‬


‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

SECTION 31 K 31 00 00 EARTHWORK
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

1. SCOPE

A. the Work Covered in this Division Comprises: Clearing of the site, and excavation and backfilling
for roads, structures, trenches, and protection work related to gabions, riprap, stone pitching
and geotextiles.

1.1 SITE CLEARING

1.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all vegetation, surface debris, stones and or areas where
the Works are to be performed.
B. When shown on drawings or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of
pavement layers including asphalt and granular layer to the surface of the subgrade. Moreover,
the ground surface under all structures shall be cleared of all existing concrete foundations (if
any) and stumps.
C. Trees shall be removed carefully, stored and / or relocated as specified or as instructed by the
concerned Authorities and the Engineer.

1.3 REMOVAL OR REALIGNMENT OF OBSTRUCTION AND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall remove wholly or in part and dispose of all obstructions, buildings, fences,
abandoned pipelines and others, as indicated on drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Where indicated on the Drawings, utilities are to be realigned or salvaged as directed by the
Engineer.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 1


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

1.4 EXCAVATION AND FILL

1.4.1 GENERAL

A. Earth: naturally occurring, man-made or placed material that can be removed manually or by
mechanical shovel, bulldozer or other mechanical equipment.
Rock/Hard Materials: naturally occurring, man-made or placed material of more than one cubic meter
that cannot be destroyed or removed by methods used for removal of earth described in Clause A but
requires the use of pneumatic tools, impact breakers or, if allowed, explosives for its removal
B. Materials and conditions: the Contractor shall assess the nature of the work and the materials to be
excavated, and shall take sole responsibility for his assessment of materials and conditions.
c. Ground-water level is to be established at the time the various excavations are carried out.

1.4.2 TOP SOIL


A. Topsoil: before beginning general excavations or filling, the Contractor shall excavate topsoil from
required areas and keep separate from excavated subsoil.
B. The Contractor shall stockpile excavated topsoil required to carry out subsequent top-soiling
operations in temporary spoil heaps on the Site as instructed.
C. Surplus Topsoil: The Contractor shall remove from the Site to a tip provided by the Contractor

1.5 EXCAVATING

1.5.1 General
A All excavation shall be performed to the line, grades, cross section and sizes shown on the drawings,
or/and directed by the Engineer.
B Methods: The Contractor shall submit with the Tender details of proposed methods of working which
may cause nuisance, damage or danger to people and/or property.
C Materials arising from excavations are to remain the property of the Employer unless instructed to be
removed from the Site as per the Engineer or the authorities instructions.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 2


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

2. Excavations for Adjacent Utilities

A Underground services must be set out so that their excavations do not encroach below a line drawn
at an angle from the horizontal from the nearest lower edge of building foundations. The angle shall
be 45 degrees for dry stable soil or 30 degrees for wet clays or soils below water table. If this
condition cannot be met obtain instructions before proceeding.

B Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle from the horizontal of 45 degrees for
dry stable soil or 30 degrees for wet clays or soils below water table from the nearest formation level
of another higher excavation then all work within the lower excavation and backfilling thereto must
be completed before the higher excavation is made.

C Excavated formations are to be inspected and approved before new work is laid on them. The
Contractor shall give 24 hours written notice of when excavations will be ready for inspection. If, after
inspection, surfaces become unsuitable due to water, frost or other causes, excavate further and
backfill with approved material all at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall place concrete or
other fill as soon as possible after inspection.

D The bottom 200 mm thickness of excavation shall be removed by hand just prior to placing concrete
blinding or pipe laying.

E The Contractor shall level or grade and compact bottoms of excavations to Engineer's approval.

F Headings: The Contractor shall drive accurately to required line and gradient and provide adequate
support. Construct in approved lengths to size required to contain permanent work. The
Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer before commencing activities.

3. Support

A Sides of Excavations: Responsibility for upholding sides of excavations rests with the Contractor.

B Earthwork Support: The Contractor shall use as necessary to support sides of excavations and
remove on completion unless otherwise instructed. In the event of any collapse occurring
while excavations are open this will be the Contractor’s full responsibility and he should re-

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 3


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

excavate and reinstate such excavations and other work affected at the Contractor's expense
and responsibility.

C Steel Sheet Piling: The Contractor shall use as necessary to support sides of excavations and
remove on completion unless otherwise instructed.

D S special Support: The Contractor shall use as necessary to uphold excavations against sides of
adjoining buildings, public footpaths, roads and the like and remove on completion unless
otherwise instructed.

E Unstable Ground: The Contractor shall inform the Engineer without delay if any newly excavated face
will not remain unsupported sufficiently long to allow the necessary earthwork support to be
inserted. If the instability is likely to affect adjacent structures or roadways take appropriate
emergency action. Responsibility for preventing instability rests with the Contractor.

F Waterways: Temporary diversion as necessary of ditches, field drains and other waterways
encountered during the excavations is to include reinstatement on completion. If reinstatement is
not possible the Contractor shall obtain instructions.

G Existing watercourses which have been diverted and are to be filled must be cleared of all vegetable
growth and soft deposits before filling.

4. Existing Foundations
A where old foundations, beds, drains etc. are encountered the Contractor shall obtain instructions
before proceeding.

B Breaking out old foundations, beds, drains etc. is to include sealing off drain ends, removing
contaminated earth and disinfecting as necessary and according to the Engineer instructions.

C Backfilling of excavations shall be as specified in other Sections of these specifications.

D Unauthorised Excavations: The Contractor shall backfill and compact as instructed at no expense to
the Employer.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 4


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E Water: All excavations shall be kept free from water arising from any source at all times. The
discharge of any water from the excavations must not effect other parts of the works or adjoining
areas.
F Pumping: The Contractor shall not disturb material in and around excavations by pumping
operations.
G Sumps: The Contractor shall obtain approval of location of any sumps and fill with approved material
when no longer required.
H Permanent drainage system is not to be used for disposal of water from excavations without
approval.
I The Contractor shall keep all excavations adequately drained at all times. Damage to any part of the
work due to poor drainage facilities shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
J All excavated slopes shall be cut to the slopes shown on the Drawings.

5. DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A No excavated material shall be wasted without written permission from the Engineer. Suitable
material from excavation shall be used for embankment construction or backfill, as directed by the
Engineer.
B Surplus Subsoil: The Contractor shall remove from the Site surplus excavated materials not specified
as to be spread and leveled or stockpiled to a tip provided by the Contractor.
C Tip: The Contractor shall use only public dumpsites assigned by the concerned authorities for
disposal of surplus excavated material removed from the Site and pay all tip fees.

6. ROCK REMOVAL
A. All blasting shall be carried out in such a manner as will produce the least possible disturbance of
the material left in place.
B. All the necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the blasting shall not be dangerous to
people or property.
C. Where necessary or directed, the Contractor shall provide heavy mesh blasting mats for protection of
persons, properties, and the Works. If, in the opinion of the Authorities and the Engineer, blasting
would be dangerous to persons or adjacent structures, or is being carried out in an unsafe or
unacceptable manner, the Engineer may prohibit blasting and order the rock to be excavated by
other means.
D. If the flow of traffic is to be interrupted during blasting operations, the Contractor shall secure
approval of his schedule for such interruptions and his proposed methods for safeguarding the
public and property.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 5
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E. All drilling and blasting shall be done in such a manner as will most nearly complete the excavation
to the required grade lines, and produce the least practicable disturbance of the material to be left in
place. Blasting by means of drill holes, tunnels, or any other methods shall be entirely at the
Contractor's risk.
F. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, rock cuts higher than 3 m shall be formed using pre-
splitting. Prior to starting the pres-splitting operation the Contractor shall submit a layout plan
showing the location of drill-holes, type of explosive to be used and sequence of firing. This plan
does not absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the safety of people and
structures, or for producing a satisfactory stable rock face. No extra cost is charged by the
Contractor for using pre-splitting.
G. All over breaks, overhangs loose blocks or unstable parts of the cut face, and benches shall be
cleared and cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
H. Backfilling of over breakage shall be carried out as directed, using approved soil or crushed
materials or other special aggregate or cyclopean concrete, as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Undrained pockets shall not be left in the surface of the rock.
7. ROAD EXCAVATION (FOR PREPARATION OF SERVICE ROADS ALONG PIPELINES)
7.1 Scope
A These Works shall consist of excavating material in cut sections of the road, including water
courses, ditches and wadi relocations (but excluding borrow pits and structural excavation)
all as and where shown on the Drawings, and hauling the excavated material either to
locations for road embankments or to stockpiles or to waste.
B These Works shall also include any necessary excavations outside the ROW ordered by the
Engineer to safeguard and protect the Works. These may include diversion of existing water
courses, channels; excavation of materials obstructing or impairing the flow along stream
channels; and excavation of unstable materials which may slide encroach into ditches or
onto the ROW. Disposal of all such excavated materials shall be as instructed by the
Engineer.

7.2 Classification of Road Excavation


A Any information concerning properties of the soil which may be shown on the plans, in the Bill of
Quantities, in supplementary reports, or as a result of discussion with the Engineer or others shall be
considered as gratis and shall not be a basis for the Contractor's determination of his bid prices.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 6


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

7.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials


A All materials removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the embankment, sub
grade, shoulder, and at such other places as directed, unless it is declared unsuitable and ordered to
be wasted by the Engineer.

7.4 Unsuitable material shall include:


A Unstable materials incapable of being compacted to the specified density using ordinary compaction
methods at optimum moisture content for the equipment being used for compaction.
B Material too wet to be compacted and circumstance prevent suitable in-place drying prior to
incorporation into the work.
C Materials which are otherwise unsuitable for use in or under the embankment.
D No excavation material shall be wasted without written permission from the Engineer.
E Excavated rock which is not immediately suitable for incorporation in the works can either be broken
down to acceptable sizes or wasted at Contractor's expense.

7.5 Drainage of Excavation Areas


A The Contractor shall schedule road excavation and embankment and drainage Works so that they
complement each other. If the Contractor's earthwork progress exceeds the progress of the drainage
construction to the point where the road becomes a dam to cross drainage, the Engineer may order
the Contractor to open adequate waterways through the highway at the locations where drainage
structures are to be installed. Any damage to the highway caused by water passing through these
openings shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

B During construction, surfaces in excavation areas shall be adequately drained at all times. Side
ditches or gutters emptying from cut to embankment shall be so constructed as to avoid damage to
embankments by erosion.

C Damage to the Works attributable to saturation or erosion through failure to provide adequate
drainage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.

D Whenever groundwater is encountered which may adversely affect construction, the Contractor shall
advise the Engineer who will evaluate the situation and order necessary remedial measures to drain
or extract water

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 7


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

7.6 Slopes, Sub grade and Ditches


A All excavated slopes, subgrade and ditches shall be finished true to lines, grades and cross sections
as shown on the Drawings.
B Slopes, except in massive rock or other material which require special treatment, shall be trimmed to
slopes not steeper than the specified slope angles and rounded at top and bottom to a smooth profile
to blend in with the adjacent terrain. Material shall not be loosened beyond the specified slope lines.
High cut areas shall continuously be monitored by an engineering geologist or a geotechnical
Engineer.
C In cuts where earth overlays a rock formation, slopes shall be benched in an approved manner.
D Ditches of all types shall be excavated and trimmed neatly in conformity with the specified grades
and cross sections. All projecting rock, stumps, roots or similar shall be removed. Ditches include
side ditches, furrow ditches, irrigation ditches, wadi relocations, etc.
E The Engineer will periodically check all or any part of the Works, to determine conformance to the
correct lines, grades and elevations. Tolerances on finished subgrade elevations and on elevations
of the surface at the underside of the subgrade layer, shall be as specified in Section 2.05 -
"Subgrade Construction".

7.7 Excavation of Unsuitable Material


A Where excavation to finished grades and cross sections exposes unsuitable material in the
subgrade, slopes or ditch inverts, etc the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the
unsuitable material and backfill the excavated areas using approved material. The Contractor shall
conduct his operations in such a way that necessary cross section measurements are taken before
such backfill is placed.

B Unsuitable material shall be disposed of as directed. Wasted unsuitable material shall not be
deposited on any cropland.

C When the Contractor is directed to excavate unsuitable material below the surface of the original
ground in fill areas, other than that required for clearing and grubbing, the depth to which unsuitable
material shall be removed will be determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall schedule the
excavation so that cross sections are taken before and after material has been removed.

D Unsuitable materials outside the ROW or ditch slopes which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are
potentially unstable and liable to slide or encroach into the ROW or into the ditches, shall be

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 8


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

excavated and disposed of as specified for unsuitable material, unless it is approved for use as
embankment fill.

E Unsuitable and surplus materials disposed of elsewhere than within the ROW shall be spread, leveled
and shaped as directed so as to present a neat and tidy appearance. No materials shall be disposed
of in such a way as to adversely affect natural drainage courses or to cause damage to the highway
or adjacent public or private property

F If approved by concerned authorities land can be used for disposal to the maximum extent
practicable. If private land is used for disposal, the Contractor shall secure the consent of the
landowner or tenant and, if necessary, and at his expense, pay for the use of such land. The use of
cropland for disposal purposes will not be permitted.

8 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

8.1 Scope
A These Works shall consist of all excavation in any material for structures associated with networks
such as water tanks, pump houses, culverts, utility ducts and water underdrains; for retaining walls
of all types; and for other major and minor structures; and including all necessary clearing and
grubbing; bailing; drainage; pumping; sheeting; temporary shoring and cribbing; construction of
temporary cofferdams or cribs; and disposal of all excavated material and backfilling with suitable
approved material; all as and where shown on the Drawings.
B These Works shall also include the removal of those portions of existing structures below ground
which would in any way obstruct or interfere with construction of new structures.

C The Contractor will be deemed to be fully aware, at the time of tendering, as to the type and nature of
soils and rock that will be encountered in structural excavations.

8.2 Excavation
A The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a sufficient time in advance of the beginning of any
excavation for structures so that the Engineer may, where necessary, survey and record the cross
sectional elevations and measurements of the existing ground and existing structures affected by the
proposed structure. Any materials removed or excavated before these measurements have been
taken and approved by the Engineer will not be paid for.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 9


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety at all times of all foundation and trench
excavations whether supported or otherwise. Approval of the Contractor's support system or
omission of a support system for any excavations shall not absolve the Contractor from his sole
responsibility in this regard.

C The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions, including shoring or otherwise, to protect
employees in the excavation and on the ground above. The Engineer will not enter excavated areas
to approve the foundation and further Works until he deems the areas to be safe.

D In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public roads and walkways, the Contractor shall erect all
necessary barricades, barriers, enclosed walkways, and warning signs necessary to restrict the
exposure of the public to the excavation.

E The sides of all foundation pits and trenches shallower than 1.5m shall be vertical and adequately
supported at all times unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Sides more than 1.5 m in depth shall
be sloped at a stable slope or supported in an approved manner unless the material through which
the pit or trench is cut is deemed to be sufficiently self supporting and not requiring support.
F Pits and trenches shall be kept free from water until footing concrete has been placed or pipes have
been installed. The Contractor shall minimize, to the maximum extent practicable, the length of time
excavated areas are open. The Contractor will be held responsible for damage due to weather,
equipment, and other causes during periods when the excavations are left open.

G The Contractor shall schedule the Works so that no excavation is left in an exposed condition for a
period greater than 20 days unless otherwise approved.

H In areas where the excavation is adjacent to public highways, roads and walkways, excavation shall
be scheduled such as not to be left in an exposed condition for more than 7 days unless otherwise
approved.
I For excavation in material sensitive to moisture (stiff clays, marls, etc.) the excavation shall be
cleaned and concrete blinding layer cast immediately on completion of the excavation.
J The Contractor must notify the Engineer of any sign of failure or cracks within or around the
excavation immediately when such signs are noticed.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 10


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

8.3 Temporary Support System


A When a temporary support system is required to protect adjacent property or to protect the public
during construction, the Contractor's design for such support system shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval prior to commencing its construction.

B All temporary support systems shall be designed with adequate factors of safety to serve with
minimal maintenance, for the duration of its intended use, and shall include adequate safety
provisions to protect the public from construction activities.

C Notwithstanding any approval of temporary support systems, the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the adequacy of their design, construction, maintenance and all necessary safety
precautions associated therewith.

8.4 Excavation for Major Structures


A The foundations for buildings, water tanks, pump houses and other major structures, shall be
excavated in accordance with the dimensions as shown on the Drawings and shall be of sufficient
size to permit the placing of the full width and lengths of the footings.

B The excavation shall be carried to the elevations shown on the Drawings or as established by the
Engineer. Borings and soil tests, made during design, and actual investigation of the completed
foundation excavation shall be utilized by the Engineer to determine final depth. No concrete shall
be placed prior to approval of the excavation pit.

C Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the bottom of all excavations shall be covered with a
75 mm minimum depth of lean (blinding) concrete Class 110/25 to serve as a working platform.

D Foundation pits or trenches shall be of sufficient size and provide minimum sufficient working space
to permit construction of structures or structure footings of the full width and length shown on the
Drawings.

E Where footings are to be constructed using formwork, the excavations shall generally not extend
more than 500 mm beyond the maximum dimension on each side of the proposed footing unless
additional working space is clearly required and approved, by the Engineer. Any unauthorised
overwidth of excavation beyond

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 11


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F the lateral limits shown on the drawings or approved by the Engineer shall be backfilled with selected
fill or lean concrete as directed by the Engineer.

G Where footings are to be located, in or adjacent to firm, original ground and where formwork is not
required or ordered, any unauthorized over depth excavation below the approved elevation of base of
footing shall be backfilled with blinding concrete.

H Where excavation to rock foundation is required, the excavation shall proceed in such a manner as to
allow the solid rock to be exposed and prepared in horizontal beds or properly serrated for receiving
the concrete. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed.

I All blasting necessary for foundation placement shall be performed prior to placing any concrete.
Blasting will not be permitted in the vicinity of concrete which has not cured for at least 14 days.
Blasting shall not affect concrete properties and integrity in any way.

J When unstable material or other unsuitable material is encountered below foundation elevation like
swelling soil or others, the Contractor shall excavate such material and replace it with suitable
backfill material or concrete as directed by the Engineer.

K If temporary works are required for maintaining the excavation dry, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the design and execution of the works. The proposed design shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval, however, such approval does not relieve the Contractor for his sole
responsibility in this regard.

9. EXCAVATION FOR PIPE TRENCHES

A. Before excavating trenches for pipes in any road, the contractor shall acquire the necessary
permission from the Engineer and concerned authorities.
B. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling (Section 2.04) shall be piled at sufficient distance
from the sides of the trench as to avoid overloading and prevent cave in. All excavated material not
required, or unsuitable for backfilling shall be removed and carted away to an approved dumping
area.
C. Trenches shall be excavated to such depths as will permit the pipes to be laid at elevations, slopes or
depths of cover indicated on the drawings, and at uniform slopes between indicated elevations.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 12
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D. Where excavation depth exceeds the level indicated on the drawings and is not authorized in writing
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall bear the cost of the excess excavation, backfill or
concrete level make up of any type as instructed by the Engineer.
E. Trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides between the elevation of the bottom of the trench and
an elevation 300 mm above the top of the pipe.
F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, trench widths will be as shown in the following table:
Pipe diameter (mm) Trench Width (mm)
Minimum Maximum
< 150 650 950
200 700 1000
250 750 1050
300 850 1150
350 900 1200
400 950 1250
450 1050 1350
500 1100 1400
600 1250 1550
700 1350 1650
800 1500 1800
900 1600 1900
1000 1750 2050
1100 1900 2200
1200 2000 2300
1300 2150 2450
1400 2250 2550
1500 2400 2700
1600 2550 2850
1700 2650 2950
1800 2800 3100
1900 2900 3200
2000 3050 3350
2100 3200 3500

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 13


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Pipe diameter (mm) Trench Width (mm)


Minimum Maximum
2200 3300 3600
2300 3450 3750
2400 3550 3850

The lowest trench width will be used for the calculation of quantities and payment for all types of trenches
and excavation in rocks. The contractor should have included in his prices any extra expenses that will be
needed for extra excavation beyond the trench width, this is applied also for the pavement and road surface
finishing works.
G. Where the above specified trench maximum widths are exceeded; the Contractor shall bear
the cost of increased pipe strength or additional pipe protection if the Engineer calls for
such measures due to excavations being taken wider than specified.

H. Excavation with battered sides shall not intrude into private property and shall respect the
statutory regulations relevant to the R.O.W. and property limits.
I. When the pipe, culvert or duct are to be laid in embankments or other fill areas, the
embankment or fill area shall first be filled and compacted as specified to the proposed
finished grade or to a height of at least 300 mm above the crown of pipe whichever is lower.
The trench shall then be excavated as in undisturbed material.
J. When pipes, culverts or ducts are to be laid under existing pavements, trenches shall be
excavated carefully and to minimum widths. Methods that will give straight and vertical face
shall be used. The pavement shall be kept at its original level and condition.
K. In combined trenches where one pipe is at a lower level than an adjacent pipe the following
shall be applied:
I. The whole trench shall have a depth related to the lower pipe and the thickness of the
bedding shall be increased to the upper pipe as necessary.
II. The lower pipe shall be backfilled with thoroughly compacted granular material up to a level
of 0.30 meters above the higher pipe. The types Of bedding as shown on drawings

L. Excavation for the forming of the trench for beds shall be carried out immediately before
laying beds or pipes. Unstable material, rock projections, boulders and hard spots shall be
removed and replaced with approved well consolidated filling material, that will be
compacted as instructed. Local soft spots shall be hardened by tamping in bedding material.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 14
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

M. The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support
for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated to the
necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Any material or block that
may cause point bearing shall be removed.
N. The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any unsuitable or weak ground material that may
found below the indicated excavation levels before executing any trimming of the
excavation, pipe laying, concreting, or other work. Where, in the judgment of the Engineer
the bottom of the trench is found unsuitable, such material shall be removed to the width
and depth ordered by the Engineer. The trench shall then be made up by backfilling with
approved material as specified herein after.

O. Where rock excavation is encountered, the trench shall be excavated to min. 200 mm below
pipe invert and replaced with granular material matching the specification in Item (2.4.5) or
concrete class 110/25, as directed by the Engineer , or according to drawings
P. Headings, when required, shall be accurately driven to required line and gradient and
adequate support shall be provided. Construction shall be carried out in approved lengths
and to size required to contain permanent work. Approval shall be obtained before starting
pipe laying or other work. In case of soil, the min. bedding should be 150 mm.
Q. Generally, trench excavation, pipe laying, and trench backfilling for any particular project
section shall be completed in twenty (20) days. At any one time, the maximum length of open
trenches in the project shall not exceed 300 meters.
R. The Contractor should give special care while excavating in paved areas, so the excavation
width not to exceed the specified width. The Contractor should use the suitable mechanical
machines to cut the pavement in straight lines and the edges should be vertical. In addition,
the Contractor should always use vehicles with suitable tires (Air tire) that will not damage
the road surface pavement.

FILL

10. SOIL FILLING AND BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 15


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

10.1 SCOPE
A This section covers general soil filling material and source, backfilling for structures, embankment
construction, backfilling for pipe trenches and all particular requirements related to these works.

10.2 FILLING MATERIAL AND BORROW MATERIAL:


A. Filling material shall be approved and capable of being compacted as specified.
B. Filling materials for foundations and general filling shall pass a three inch U.S. standard sieve and
the material passing a No. 4 U.S. standard sieve is to have a maximum plasticity index of 6%. No
piece is to have its largest dimension greater than one-third the thickness of a compacted layer.
C. Sampling: The Contractor shall submit 50 kg representative samples to an approved laboratory for
tests as follows and submit results for approval:
I. For Soils with Less than 50% Fines: Sieve analysis and compaction.
II. For Soils with More than 50% Fines: Sieve analysis, Atteberg Limits and Compaction.

D. Approval: Sources and types of materials and moisture contents at which they may be placed and
compacted are to be those approved after receipt of laboratory test results.
E. If suitable filling or backfill material is not available from material excavated on the project site, the
Contractor shall be responsible for locating suitable borrow and arranging for the excavation of
suitable material with the land owner.
F. Borrow pits are to be excavated in a uniform manner, neatly trimmed and graded and left in an
approved condition.
G. The borrow material shall fulfill the requirements specified for the intended use. No borrow material
shall be brought to the site unless it has been approved by the Engineer.
H. Testing Fill from Borrow Pits: The Contractor shall sample and test in accordance with ASTM D1557
to determine the optimum amount of water to be used with fill material to obtain maximum dry
density. Tests are to be conducted for every borrow pit and for every type of fill material
encountered.

I. The Engineer will periodically require testing of borrow materials to verify that no change in quality
has occurred since the original approval.
J. Field density tests on compacted soils are to be made at an average of one test per 100 m² of area.
Minimum density required on soils when made in accordance with ASTM D2167 'Rubber Balloon
Method', ASTM D1556 'Sand-Cone Method' or ASTM D2922 "Nuclear Method" is to be:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 16


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. For Backfill Under Roads, Parking Areas and Paved Areas up to 500 mm: 95% of maximum
dry density
II.
III. For Backfill Deeper than 500 mm Under Same Areas as last Described: 95% of maximum dry
density
IV.
V. Elsewhere Such as Landscaped Areas: 90% of maximum dry density.
K. Selected Fill: Excavated material conforming to the specification for Filling material and Borrow
material, Clause B above.

11. BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES


11.1 General Requirements
A. The Contractor shall obtain approval for his proposed method and rate of placing of backfill, before
backfilling commences.
B. Excavated material or material from other sources for use as backfilling shall conform to the below
requirements:
I. The supplied material shall not contain any organic or harmful material e.g: tree, leaves, roots, and
residues.
II. The supplied material shall conform to classification types: A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4, according to MRDTM 210
(Directorate of Material and Research at the MOC).
III. The California Bearing Ratio shall not be less than 25% when tested according to MRDTM 213.
IV. The maximum dry density shall not be less than 95% when tested according to Directorate of Material
and Research at the MOC.
V. The material shall be well graded passing sieve no. 3 (75 mm sieve) and shall contain fine material for proper
compaction.
C. Backfill materials shall be uniformly graded granular material, capable of being compacted to
the specified compaction level, and having adequate permeability to permit free drainage
through it. Backfill material shall also conform to the following:
Minimum D10 value 1 mm

Maximum Plasticity Index 10 per cent

Requirement for bridges, culverts etc. specified in subsequent sections.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 17


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D. Backfill material shall not be placed against any structure until approval is given. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Structures shall be backfilled to the same requirements
as specified for the adjacent embankment.
E. Backfill shall be placed in level layers for the full width of the excavated area until the
elevation of the original ground or surrounding embankment is reached. Backfill next to
walls, between columns or in other confined areas, shall be compacted by approved hand or
portable equipment.
F. Each successive layer of backfill shall contain only sufficient material to ensure proper
compaction and in no case shall any layer be greater than 300 mm thickness (before
compaction). The moisture content of the backfill material shall be uniform and within the
moisture range designated.
G. Water shall be drained from the areas to be backfilled wherever practicable. In cases where,
in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practicable to drain the areas to be backfilled, the
initial backfill material shall consist of crushed, open graded material conforming to the
following gradation:

ASTM Sieve Percentage Passing


Size

3/8" 100
No. 4 < 85
No. 30 < 45
No. 200 <5
H. Such material may be deposited below the standing water level without compaction. Above the water
level normal laying and compaction will be used.
I. Additional water to be added during placement of backfill material to achieve required compaction
shall be fresh water or brackish water approved by the Engineer.
J. Minimum tests required during backfilling operations to verify material are:
K. One Proctor test for each structure (or for each 100 m2).
L. One Gradation of Materials when materials changed.
M. One Plasticity Index and field density for 50% of the layers and for each footing and abutment (or for
each 500 m2) as per instruction of the Engineer.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 18


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

12. Workmanship
A. Unsuitable Materials: The Contractor shall remove from the Site imported filling materials deemed
unsuitable by the Engineer.

B. Surplus: The Contractor shall remove surplus imported filling materials from the Site.
C. The Contractor shall place filling using approved methods to required dimensions, levels, lines and
profiles and to permit water to drain freely.
D. Earthmoving Equipment: The Contractor shall do not use for compaction except where approved.
E. Heavy Steel or Pneumatic Rollers: Special precautions shall be taken to safeguard existing structures
when steel or pneumatic rollers are used. These shall not be used when compacting backfill to pipe
trenches.

F. Compaction Equipment: Backfilling shall be compacted by approved compaction equipment suited


to the type of material. Compaction around foundation walls, culverts and small restricted areas shall
be carried out by mechanical vibratory plates, tampers or hydraulic compactors.
G. Moisture Content: Each layer of filling shall be moistened or dried to reach the correct moisture
content for the required dry density. The Contractor shall spread and compact each layer to at least
95% of maximum dry density, unless otherwise specified, all as determined by ASTM D1557. Each
compacted layer shall be tested and approved prior to placing subsequent layers.

13. Placing and Compacting Fill

A. Structures shall not be subject to the pressures of backfilling or to live loads until the 28-day
strength of the concrete has been reached, unless a shorter period is approved in special
circumstances where the load is

B. sufficiently small as not to constitute a risk of any damage to the structure in the opinion of the
Engineer. If approved this period may be extended if subnormal curing conditions exist.

C. Surfaces to receive filling shall be cleared and all vegetation removed off Site before filling is placed.
Soil surfaces are to be scarified and re-compacted to at least 95% of maximum dry density as
determined by ASTM 1557. Compaction shall be to a depth of at least 200 mm below ground surface.
Hard or smooth surfaces shall be roughened before filling is placed. Existing road surfaces and the
like shall be broken up and removed or used as part of fill.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 19
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D. Soil filling generally shall be selected fill spread and leveled in 300 mm maximum layers each well
consolidated with a suitable mechanical rammer.

E. The Contractor shall deposit soil filling in a manner not to endanger the partly finished structure or
sub-structure either by direct pressure or indirectly by overloading banks contiguous to the
operation or in any other manner.

F. Minor up filling and local adjustment of levels shall be selected fill spread and leveled in 150 mm
maximum layers each well consolidated by suitable mechanical means.
G. Benching: Where difference in level between adjacent areas of filling exceeds 600 mm the Contractor
shall cut into edge of higher filling to form benches having a minimum width of 600 mm and a height
equivalent to the depth of a layer of compacted filling.

13.1 Benching: The Contractor shall spread and compact new filling to ensure maximum continuity with
previous filling.

13.2 Protection of formation:

I. Construction traffic shall not be allowed on completed filling until the level has been raised not less
than 150 mm above formation level by properly compacted temporary protective filling

II. Temporary protective filling shall be removed from the Site before beginning permanent construction
III. Stockpiling materials on newly filled areas shall not be done without permission.

14. Backfilling for Bridges, Underpasses, Overpasses and Miscellaneous Structures

A. Backfill placed around culverts, abutments and piers, shall be deposited on both sides to
approximately the same elevation at the same time. Special care shall be taken to prevent any
wedging action against the structure and slopes bounding the excavation shall be stepped, where
necessary, to prevent such wedge action occurring.

B. All backfill intended to support false workloads, including temporary fills and pier backfill, shall be
designed for the minimum support required. As a minimum, such material shall be AASHTO M 145,
Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4, compacted to 90% AASHTO T 180 maximum density.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 20
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C. Backfill material for bridge abutments and approach embankments within 20 m of any part of the
substructure shall be AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4 compacted to 95% AASHTO T 180
maximum density up to the underside of the subgrade layer. The 200 mm minimum thickness of
subgrade layer shall consist of approved subgrade material placed and compacted to 100%
maximum density as specified under Section 2.05 - "Subgrade Construction". The backfill shall be
completed to the level of the original ground or to the top elevation of any adjacent embankment.

D. Backfill around retaining walls shall be completed to the level of the original ground line and to such
heights above original ground line or to the levels as shown on the Drawings. Care shall be
exercised to prevent forward movement of the wall.

E. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, when special permeable backfill (sheathing) is to be
placed against the back faces of abutments, retaining walls or wing walls, it shall consist of a
continuous covering of approved type proprietary filter cloth protected by a continuous wall of
200 mm minimum thickness precast, porous (no-fines) concrete blocks laid in stretcher bond with
dry joints. Prior to construction of the block wall, the proposed underdrain system indicated on the
drawings shall be laid along the base of the wall under the sheathing.

F. The Contractor shall complete the backfill around box culverts to the level of the original ground line
and to the full width of excavation area. If the top of culvert extends above the original ground line
the Contractor shall continue the backfill to the top of culvert and for a width of 3 m on each side of
the culvert for the full width of highway embankment. If the embankment is in place at the time of
backfilling, the Contractor shall backfill around the culvert to the top of embankment.

G. Miscellaneous structures shall be backfilled in accordance with the methods specified. Compaction
of backfill when structures are outside the roadway right-of-way or in approach roads, minor roads or
similar areas, shall be to 90% of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T 180 (Method D).

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 21


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

14. PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE TRENCHES

14.1 Granular Bedding and Backfill materials

A. Backfilling above pipe crest shall be with clean granular Class A-3 in layers 30 cm thick and shall
pass sieve No. (4) 4.75 mm, and be retained by sieve No. (200) 0.075 mm.

B. Granular material for pipe bedding shall be composed of 14 mm maximum size natural gravel,
crushed gravel or crushed rock, free from dirt, clay, roots, organics and other deleterious material
mixed with sufficient sand to fill the voids, about 30 to 35% by volume.

C. Granular bedding shall conform to the following:

D. Standard Sieve size E. % By Weight Passing


F. (mm) G. H. for rigid pipes J. PE pipes
I. (DI or AC etc.)
K. 19.0 L. (3/4 in) M. 100 N.
O. 4.76 P. (No. 4) Q. 25-100 R. 100
S. 1.19 T. (No. 16) U. 10-75 V. 25-75
W. 0.300 X. (No. 50) Y. 5-30 Z. 10-30
AA. 0.177 BB. (No. 80) CC. 3-10 DD. 3-10
EE. 0.075 FF. (No. 200) GG. 0-5 HH. 0-5

For GRP pipes bedding shall be of graded crushed stone 2.83-8 mm or as recommended by
Manufacturer.
D. Sand bedding and fill up to 300 mm minimum above crown of the pipe shall be non-plastic,
natural well graded sand having hard, strong, durable angular particles. It shall be clean and
free from extraneous materials, clay balls, organic matter or other detrimental material. The
amount of fines passing sieve No. 200 shall not exceed 15% or according to the standard
specifications (ASTM C33).
E. Backfill over a pipe shall consist of two different layers: Initial or selected backfill and main
backfill

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 22


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F. Backfill in contact with the pipes and up to 300 mm minimum above crown of the pipe shall
be selected material
G. Selected fill material shall comply with group type GW, GP, GM, BC, SW, SP, SM, SL in
compliance with ASTM D 2487.
H. Selected fill material shall not contain ashes, cinder, refuse, rubbish, organic material, or the
like. The material shall be capable of being compacted without the use of heavy rammers.
I. The main backfill (for the remainder of the trench) shall be done with suitable material either
from material removed in the course of excavating the trench, or imported from approved
borrow pit. In either case the backfill material shall conform to paragraph B of section 2.04.2
herein before.
J. Pipelines should be covered by plain concrete if the top cover is less than 1 m or for deep
pipelines as per the manufacturer recommendations.

14.2 Workmanship: Backfilling

A. Trenches shall not be backfilled at joints until after that section of the pipeline has successfully
passed the specified tests required

B. Selected backfill or surround up to a level of 300 mm above top of the pipe, shall be placed and hand
compacted in 150 mm layers. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the
full length of the pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the
haunches of the pipe.

C. For GRP pipe initial backfill shall be compacted to 95% relative density or as recommended by
manufacturers.

D. Main backfill shall be placed and well compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm thick before
compaction. Heavy compactors shall not be used until there is 600 mm cover over pipes.

E. Compaction of each layer shall be according to Section 2.04.2 paragraph J herein before.

F. Heavy steel or pneumatic rollers shall not be used for compacting backfill to pipe trenches. Special
precautions shall be taken to safeguard existing structures when steel or pneumatic rollers are used.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 23


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

G. Compaction equipment shall be suited to the type of material and shall be subject to approval.
Compaction around foundation walls, culverts and small restricted areas shall be carried out by
mechanical vibratory plates, tampers or hydraulic compactors.

H. Backfilling trenches for pipes with concrete beds and or surrounds shall not start before 24 hours
after placing the concrete. Heavy compactors shall not be used and traffic shall not be allowed before
the elapse of 72 hours after placing the concrete.

I. When the material is too wet from rain or excessive application of water, no compaction shall be
done. In this case the work shall be suspended until the previously placed and new materials have
dried sufficiently to permit proper compaction. Other measures shall be taken if necessary to obtain
proper compaction.

J. Temporary crossing are to be provided over trenches to prevent construction traffic damaging pipes
after backfilling.

K. The top 500 mm of pipe trenches below road pavement layers shall be filled with crushed aggregate
base course material compacted to 95% of maximum dry density.

L. If authorized by the Engineer, the main backfill may be consolidated using water-jetting, puddling, or
tamping as directed.

14.3 Restoration of surfaces

A. Restoration of asphalt, concrete, gravel pavements and the likes shall be of materials and thickness
to match the existing pavement. All works, workmanship material shall be in accordance with
concerned authorities specifications (Directorate, Municipality, Ministry of transport) and Engineer
direction.

B. Restoration of pavement shall be done according to the existing pavement quality and level to ensure
that new pavement is matching to provide uniform surface with the existing profile.

C. Grassed areas shall be restored by spreading, after backfilling, approved fertile soil over affected
area. Seeding, fertilizers and water shall be applied until grass is restored to its former condition.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 24


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D. Surface grading shall be carried out to restore all un-surfaced areas and any adjoining areas
disturbed to provide a level, smooth surface.

E. The Contractor shall proceed with restoration of surfaces as soon after completion of other work as
is practicable, but in no case more than 10 days after backfilling of trenches and other excavated
areas. Restoration shall be completed within 20 days from the start of restoration or as approved by
the concerned authorities.

15. GEOTEXTILES ( NOT USED)

15.1 GENERAL
A. Geotextiles are used for protection and containment of the granular bedding and the first dump layer
around GRP pipes in the presence of water table in the trench.
B. The work include the supply and installation of geotextile fabric as indicated on the Drawings.

15.2 MATERIAL
15.2.1 Drainage Fabric
A. Non-woven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins,
polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to
ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
 Grab Tensile Strength: 490 N (ASTM D 4632)
 Tear Strength: 178 N (ASTM D 4533)
 Puncture Resistance: 222 N (ASTM D 4833)
 Water Flow Rate: 100 l/sec/m2 (ASTM D 4491)
 Apparent Opening Size: 0.3 mm (ASTM D 4751)

15.2.2 Separation Fabric


A. Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation geotextile; made from
polyolefin's, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined
according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
I. Grab Tensile Strength: 890 N (ASTM D 4632)
II. Tear Strength: 333 N (ASTM D 4533)
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 25
EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

III. Puncture Resistance: 400 N (ASTM D 4833)


IV. Water Flow Rate: 2.7 l/sec/m2 (ASTM D 4491)
V. Apparent Opening Size: 0.6 mm (ASTM D 4751)

16. WORKMANSHIP
A. Store and handle geotextiles in accordance with ASTM D 4873. Place and install in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows, to the approval of the Engineer.

I. Overlaps shall not, in any case, be less than 25 mm

II. Place bedding layer as soon as possible after placement of the geotextile, in accordance with
approved methods, to thickness shown on Drawings
III. Remove and replace any geotextile damaged or punctured either before, during or after laying.

END OF SECTION

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section 31 00 00 ‐ 26


EARTHWORK
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

SECTION 33 14 00 WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION

WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING

1 SCOPE

A. The works cover the supply of materials, installation, testing and commissioning of all pipes, fittings, valves, and
appurtenances.

2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. GENERAL

A. Scope
This section outlines the sequence of construction works, aspects related to the right of way (ROW) and the general
requirements for supply and handling of equipment's and materials.

2.1.1 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of construction as set out below unless a justified request for
modifying this sequence is approved by the Engineer at least two weeks prior to commencement of work on the
affected section of the network:

I. Stake out pipe alignments.

II. Clear and grade the right of way.

III. Conduct field surveys.

IV. Carry out exploratory trenching across existing roads to verify location, depth, size and type of existing utilities.
V. Prepare and submit to Supervision Engineer for approval composite Shop Drawings for all utilities showing
alignment, ground elevation, trench invert elevation, pipe size, class and length, station and size of fittings, valves
as applicable chambers, inlets, appurtenances and structures to be demolished and reinstated (curbstone, rails,

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 1


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

culverts, etc.). Cross sections showing location and inverts of existing pipes and those proposed shall be
prepared. Pipes, structures and other utilities to be removed or relocated shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings.
The Contract Drawings shall be modified wherever required to produce the Shop Drawings.

VI. Relocate, demolish and reinstate existing utilities interfering with pipeline alignments.

VII. Remove pavement layers, excavate trenches, and place bedding all as required.

VIII. Lay and join pipes, fittings, appurtenances, valve chambers, etc…

IX. Place primary backfill material.

X. Perform required air, hydraulic or other required testing.

XI. Install required house connections and or connections to existing utilities as required.

XII. Place final backfill.

XIII. Restore or reinstate surfaces and structures as required.

XIV. Carry out final surface works road surfacing curb stone, backing walls, side walk tiling, etc…

XV. Dispose of surplus materials.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 2


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

2.2.2 RIGHT OF WAY (ROW)

A. Extent
All utilities services shall be installed in the right-of-way of existing or proposed roads as shown on the Drawings and as
per concerned authorities directions.

B. Clearing and Grading

I. The ROW shall be used for both access to works sites and for service roads for the pipelines.

II. In case the pipelines run outside existing roads, the ROW shall be cleared and graded to the required slopes; road
cross-sections and all drains, shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

III. Road surfacing / resurfacing works shall commence only after completion of pipe installation and construction of
all required works.

3. MATERIALS, PRODUCTS SUPPLY AND HANDLING

3.1 Structural Materials


A Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.01 "Concrete and Concrete Mixes and Testing".

B Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.03 "Steel Reinforcement and Fixing".

3.2 Products supply requirements

A Manufacturer’s certificate: Materials shall be supplied with a certificate for each delivery. The certificate shall
clearly state that products comply with the specified Standards and have been factory tested accordingly.

B Marking: Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standard products shall have legibly cast, stamped or indelibly
painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
I. Manufacturer's name, initials and identification mark.

II. Nominal diameter.

III. Class designation.


SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 3
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

IV. Initials and number of relevant Standard.

V. Length of pipe if shorter than standard length.

VI. Angle of bends in degrees.

VII. Date of manufacture.

C Special tests: Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply and transport samples of materials
selected by the Engineer to a testing laboratory. The number of samples shall not exceed 0.5% of total supplied.
However, at least one sample from each class, diameter and manufacturer shall be tested. Failure of any sample
shall be followed by a second and if necessary a third test from the same batch regardless of whether the limits on
number of tests has been exceeded or not. A third test failure shall result in all material from that manufacturer
being rejected and replaced by material from a different manufacturer, subject to approval and satisfactory tests.
Laboratory test report in an approved form must be provided

3.3 Products handling

3.3.1 General

A Manufacturer’s recommendations on handling, repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, testing and other works for
pipes and fittings shall be strictly followed.

B For loading and unloading, the Contractor shall use cranes, hoists or skidways as directed by the Engineer. Use of
hooks, spreader beams, ropes, band or wire slings etc. shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of each
type of pipe and as approved by the Engineer.

C Pipes shall be stacked on horizontal surfaces. Pipes shall not be stored on their sockets or jointing failings. End
pipes in bottom row shall be secured by chocks. The allowable height of stacks shall be to the manufacturer's
instructions.

D Material and equipment shall be handled with care whenever moved by hand, skidways or hoists and any damage
incurred shall result in the material being rejected.

E The Contractor shall provide safe storage for the material. The interior of pipes, fittings etc. shall be kept free from
dirt and foreign matter. Shade for materials shall be provided as required by manufacturer's instructions and to the
Engineer's approval.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 4
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F Cutting hacksaws, manually operated wheel cutters or pipe cutting machines shall be used as per manufacturer's
instructions. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, special precautions are to be taken to eliminate airborne particles,
methods and equipment shall be used as directed by the Engineer. Ends shall be prepared according to type of
joint used and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be taken to avoid any damage to the lining.
Minor damage may be repaired on site as directed by the Engineer.

G The Contractor shall repair damaged coating, sheathing or lining in accordance with the Specification and
manufacturer's instructions. Material used for repair work shall be compatible with that originally used. All repair
works shall be approved by the Engineer before incorporating materials into the work.

H Bricks and cast iron frames and covers of valve chambers and all other construction materials shall be loaded and
unloaded by fitting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. No hooks shall be used inside pipe.
Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled
against the other pipe or other materials already on the ground.

I All materials shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. In distributing the material at the site
of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded opposite or at the nearest possible place where it is to be laid in the
trench.

J A space of suitable width, clear of any spoil materials shall be left all along the trench so that no pipes shall be
placed on excavated material.

3.3.2 GRP Pipes and Fittings

A For handling GRP pipes, fittings and rubber ring gaskets, instructions of the manufacturer shall be strictly adhered
to GRP pipes and fittings shall be suitably wedged or braced to prevent damage during shipment and
transportation and rubber rings gaskets and lubricants shall be packed in suitable containers.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 5


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B The allowable stack height is 2.5 meters or as per manufacturer’s specification. When storing the pipes directly on
ground, the ground shall be free of stones and materials causing any damage.

C While lifting, the supports shall be pliabe straps or ropes and shall not be steel cables or chains unless sufficient
padding is provided to protect pipes surfaces. Pipes shall never be dropped.

3.3.3 HDPE Pipes and Fittings

Manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly adhered to while handling pipes and fittings. Extreme care shall be taken when
handling pipes and fittings.

The pipes shall be loaded using enough supports to avoid any sort of bending, distortion, damage, scratches to the barrel
or ends or any part of pipes and fittings. When off loading, pipes shall be lowered taking all precautions to avoid bending,
distortion, damage, scratches and never be dropped to the ground. Pipes shall be given adequate and enough supports
while stacking. Pipes shall never be stacked in large piles or under direct sun light to avoid ultraviolet degradation and
manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly adhered to. Any pipe with ends prepared for jointing shall be stacked in layers
with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stack and with the sockets protruding to avoid unstable stacks.

For long term storage, pipes shall be stored in pipe racks providing continuous support under a shed with insulated roof
and shall never be kept under sunlight to avoid ultraviolet degradation.

Also while loading pipes and fittings, care must be taken to avoid their coming into contact with any sharp corners such an
angle irons, sharp steel sheets, and loose nail-heads. While in transit, pipes shall be well secured over their entire length.
While off-loading, care shall be taken that pipes and fittings do not fall one upon another or to any hard or uneven surfaces.
Pipes and fittings shall be transported to the site in special pile rack type containerized units to facilitate loading, unloading,
onsite storage, retrieval and protection of pipes and fittings from sunlight and ultraviolet radiations.

3.3.4 Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) Pipe


For handling RCC pipes, the instruction of the respective manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to. RCC pipes shall be
handled with great care while transporting to the site and while installing. Each pipe shall be properly wedged to stop any
movement, which may cause damage to the bell and spigot or tongue and groove ends of the pipes.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 6


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Each pipe shall be carefully inspected before being laid and no cracked or defective pipe shall be used. Chipping of the bell
and spigot or tongue and groove pipe ends, which in the Engineer’s opinion may cause defective joints, shall be avoided.
All cracked and defective pipes shall be rejected.

3.3.5 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings

All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored strictly according to the instructions of manufacturer.

Pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, cast iron frames and covers and all other construction materials shall be loaded and
unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. No hooks shall be used inside the pipe. Under
no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe or
other materials already on the ground.

In distributing the material at the site of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be
laid in the trench.
Pipe shall be so handled that coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is
damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense according to

Manufacturer’s specifications or in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, or be replaced as determined by the Engineer.

3.3.6 Rubber Ring Gaskets

All gaskets for vitrified clay (VC), unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC), Glass fiber reinforced concrete (RC) pipes and
fittings shall be handled and stored strictly according to their respective manufacturer’s instructions.

For storage of gaskets, the storage temperature is to be between + 5˚C and + 25˚C. If stored at low temperatures and
taken out for immediate use, their temperature must be brought to approximately 30˚C prior to their use. The gaskets are to
be protected from direct sunlight and a strong artificial light

with ultraviolet content. The gaskets must be protected from the surrounding air either by wrapping them up or storing them
in hermetically sealed boxes.

3.4 Materials and Equipment Furnished by the Contractor

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 7


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment that will be incorporated in the works and all other
materials and equipment needed during construction. He shall also furnish such constructional plant and
equipment as in the opinion of the Engineer, is necessary and adequate to perform all work within the scheduled
time for completion.

B the tenderer shall state in the schedule provided in the trade name of materials and equipment he intends to
incorporate in the works as well as the name of the manufacturer and his full address. The Contractor shall be
bound to use the same manufacturer materials and equipment quoted in his Tender.

C The Contractor shall, within 60 days after receipt of the order to commence, submit to the Engineer in triplicate
certified copies of the unpriced agreements with the manufacturers of the materials and equipment to be used in
the works. Such agreements shall embody all the appropriate specification clauses including testing and
inspection and shall state delivery periods.

D Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be brand new and of the type and quality described in
the specification. The Contractor shall procure all materials and equipment, whether specified or substituted, from
eligible sources. Where, because of Employer’s priorities

or other causes, materials or equipment required by the specification become unavailable, substituted materials or
equipment may be used.

E The Engineer’s decision as to whether substitution shall be permitted and as to what substitute materials.

A. Inspection of Materials and Equipment

I. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor which will become a part of the permanent works shall be
subject to inspection at any one or more of the following locations as determined by the Engineer: at the place of
production or manufacture, at the hipping point, or at the site.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 8


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

II. The allow sufficient time to provide for inspection, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, at the time of
issuance, copies in triplicate of purchase orders, including drawings and other pertinent information, covering
materials and equipment on which inspection will be made as advised by the Engineer, or shall submit other
evidence in the event such purchase orders are issued verbally or by

III. letter. The inspection of materials and equipment or the waiving of the inspection thereof shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
specification.

B. Rejected Materials
I. Should any materials, equipment or manufactured articles prove to be, in the judgment of the Engineer or as a
result of testing, unsound or of inferior quality or in any way unsuitable for the works in which it is proposed to
employ them, such materials, equipment or manufactured articles shall not be used in the works but shall be
branded, if in the opinion of the Engineer this is necessary, and shall forthwith be removed from the site and
replaced at the Contractor’s expense and in each case as the Engineer shall direct.

C. Approved Manufacturer’s Instructions

I. The Contractor shall supply the equipment, materials or other items from the approved manufacturers listed or
equal and approved.

II. All equipment or materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturers’ original unopened containers with
the manufacturers’ brand and name clearly marked on.

III. All equipment or materials shall be assembled, mixed, fixed, applied installed or otherwise incorporated in the
works in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the equipment or materials and/or the
relevant standards as specified.

D. Certification and Third Party Inspection

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 9


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. All material provided by Contractor shall be procured from ISO/BS certified manufacturers. The certificate should
cover all the processes associated with the production of the manufactured item and should be submitted to the
Engineer approval with the material submittals by the Contractor. Upon the request of the Engineer, the Contractor
shall propose an internationally accredited and reputable audit firm to act as a third party inspector who shall
certify that all material manufactured and shipped for the project have been manufactured and conforms to the
specified international standard governing the manufacture of the finished item / product as specified in the project
Tender Documents. The scope of the third party inspection shall cover at least the quality control tests listed in the
forth coming sections of the Specification. The cost of the third party inspection shall be borne by the Contractor.

4. PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

4.1 MATERIALS

The following pipe material for water supply network shall be used,
The following paragraph describes the specifications of each of these pipes:

5. Ductile Iron Utility Pipe

A Use DI pipes Class K9 for water supply network for operating pressure up to 24 bars.

B Ductile iron pipe for water shall be to BS EN 545 or equivalent. Unless otherwise indicated in the Bill of Quantities
or the Drawings, Class K9 shall be used for all pipe diameters, and in the case where pressure does not exceed
16 bars for large diameters, class K8 pipes shall be used.

C Ductile iron fittings shall be to IS02531 or BS EN545 [1] or equivalent with socket/ spigot ends. Joint deflection at
installation shall not exceed 50% of the maximum allowed by manufacturer.

D Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used for straight runs and adjacent to elbows or fittings. These joints shall
be provided with rubber gaskets, and an external thrust block is required at elbows or fittings. Anchored or self
restrained joints shall be used for sections adjacent to elbows in areas where space is restricted or indicated on

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 10


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

the Drawings or Bill of Quantities. Anchored joints are to be push-in, self anchored type able to take up the axial
forces thus allowing concrete thrust blocks to be dispensed with. The Contractor shall submit calculations verifying
the number of restrained joints required noting that pipe pressure testing will be made when pipes are partially
backfilled and joints are exposed.

E Rubber gasket shall be to BS/EN545 or ISO 4633 or equivalent.

F Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have screwed-on or cast-on flanges to sustain working pressure of - PN 16
minimum.

G Flanges shall conform to ISO 2531 or BS 4504 [2] or equivalent

H . Factory protection for pipes:

I. Pipes shall be internally cement lined to confirm with ISO4179 or BS EN 545 [1] or equivalent and according to
specified thicknesses.
i. The cement mortar lining shall be certified as suitable for use with potable water by an
internationally accepted organization such as UK’s WRC (Water Research Center)

II. Externally, pipe shall be coated with metallic zinc to conform with BS EN 545 [1] or ISO 8179 or equivalent and
followed by a bitumen coat to BS 3416 [4] or ISO8179 or equivalent.

6. Additional Site Protection for Ductile Iron Pipes

6.1 Polyurethane Coating

The coating shall be 100% solid polyurethane consists of two components: one isocyanides-rich solution and one oplyol-
rich solution.

The coating shall be completely continuous and free from all holidays, voids, pinholes or other defects.

The test certificate shall state the property of the coating and shall specify the test method used.

The polyurethane coating system shall comply with the data included in the following Tables:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 11


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Technical Data of Polyurethane External Coating

Material Polyurethane, 2 Components airless applicator


Color Black
Density 1.6g/mm3
Tensile Strength 25N/ mm3
Adhesion to Steel > 8Mpa (Stee grit blasted SA21/2)
Dielectric Strength 200 Kv/cm
Water Absorption 3.5% at 25C
Impact Resistance > 15Nm
Temperature Resistance 90C continuous
Salt Water Spray No effect after 1000hrs
Elongation > 10%
Chemical Resistance Water solution of salts, acids, and bases of pH 1-14
Thickness 1-1.5mm

6.2 Polyethylene Sleeves

Protective polyethylene sleeves shall be used with all DI pipes and fittings to be installed in buried condition and shall be in
accordance with ISO 8180.
The minimum nominal thickness of the sleeve shall be 0.010 inch (250 microns) with a maximum minus tolerance of 10%.
The material shall be made from a polymer with a melt flow index as measured according to BS 2782, of 10 or less and a
density in the range of 0.915 to 925g/ml. The sleeve shall be free from pinholes,
gels, undispersed raw materials and particles of foreign matter. The film may not contain more than 5% by weight of
material other than polyethylene.
Polyethylene sleeving shall be stored in cool dry store away from direct sunlight or excessive heat, the length of the roll, the
pipe size for which it is intended.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 12


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

6.3 Repair of Coating and Lining

In case of repairs are needed the Contractor shall take immediate action to correct the situation.

All the repairs to the coated or lined pipe and fitting shall be at the Contractor own expense.

The Contractor shall submit the repair procedure to the Employer for approval. The procedure for the repair shall be as
directed by the Engineer and the manufacture specification.

6.4 Anti Corrosion Pipe Wrapping Tape

The tape shall be supplied 150 mm or 225 mm wide in 15 m or 25 m rolls, or approved by Engineer depending upon the
requirements.

I. Pipe diameters up to 200mm, 150mm width tape shall be used.

II. Pipe diameters above 200mm, 225mm width tape shall be used.

The adhesive compound shall be of the pressure sensitive type (that is, not requiring a primer in order to achieve bond to
the substrata) and shall have thickness between 0.75 to 0.90 mm. Flow coefficient of bitumen viscosity at 200˚C and
175˚C shall be 5.5 poise and 7.5 poise respectively.

The tape shall be supplied with a wider high quality silicon release paper covering complete tape. Both sides of the tape
shall have a minimum of 5mm wider silicon release paper to prevent edge contamination.

During storage at maximum storage temperature of 500 C for six months, the adhesive material shall not flow out of the
release paper and there shall not be any end blocking.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 13


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Wrapping tape shall be marked with the following information:

I. Manufacturers name & logo

II. Date of manufacture

III. Width of the tape

IV. Batch number

6.5 Wrapping Procedure

To increase the wrapping protection efficiency, pipe diameters up to 300mm must be wrapped using semi-automatic tape
wrapping machine and for pipe diameters above 300mm, fully automatic wrapping machine should be used.

6.6 Storage

Wrapping tape should be stored in dry, cool, well ventilated condition, out of direct sunlight.

6.7 Packing

Roll shall be placed in a cardboard carton in layers in vertical position. A proper separator for safe storage shall separate
each layer. The boxes shall be marked at two places given name and logo of manufacturer, tender no., type, size and
quantity of material in black/blue color letters with a minimum height of 50mm.
The wrapping tape shall also conform to the following specifications given below;
S. No. Property Test Method Unit Data
1 Color - - -
1.1 Backing - - Blue RAL
5000/5001/
5005/5010/2017
1.2 Adhesive Compound - - Black
1.3 Release Paper - - White / Cream
3 Backing Thickness Min. - mm 0.75
4 Total Thickness Min. - mm 1.5

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 14


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

S. No. Property Test Method Unit Data


5 Elongation BS 2782 % 270
6 Tensile Strength Tape BS 2782 N/mm2 14.8
7 Modules BS2782 N/mm2 50
8 Tear Strength ASTM D1004 N 50
9 Impact Resistance (Two Layers) DIN 30627 Nm 15

Viscosity at 200˚C Cone & Plate Poise 5.5


Viscosity at 175˚C Cone & Plate Poise 7.5
11 Adhesion to Steel ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
12 Adhesion to Tape ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
Electrical
13 Dielectric Strength BS 2782 kV 30
14 Insulation Resistance ASTM D 257 Ohm/cm2 1012
15 Cathodic Disbondment ASTM G 8 mm2 NIL
16 Water Vapor permeability BS 2782 g/m2/24h 0.4
17 Water Absorption ASTM D 570 % 0.1
18 Bacterial Growth Disbondment - - NIL
Temperature
19 For Wrapping - ˚C 0 to + 50
20 In Service - ˚C 0 to + 50
21 For Storage - ˚C Up to + 50

6.8 Factory protection for fittings

Fittings shall be coated internally and externally according to EN 545 Clause 4-5 using epoxy based material, minimum
epoxy content 70% and minimum thickness 10 mil.

6.9 Testing on Ductile Iron Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on samples from every batch of DI pipes delivered to site. A report of the third party
inspector shall cover at least these tests all as approved by the Engineer. All tests shall be carried out according to
BS/EN545 or ISO 2531 or equivalent:
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 15
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. Visual inspection

II. Microscopic structure

III. Tensile strength

IV. Elongation

V. Brinell hardness

VI. Lining thickness

VII. Composition and thickness of external coating

VIII. Ring bending and detachment of lining for pipes > 500 mm diameter

IX. Hydrostatic test

7. Steel Utility Pipe

7.1 Steel Pipe for Water Service

A Use steel pipe for transmission lines of diameters 200 mm and above, for operating pressure up to 40 bars.

B Steel pipe size 150 mm (6") and smaller shall be welded black steel, seamless or welded, and shall conform to BS
1387 [15] medium class, ISO 65 or DIN 2440.

C Steel pipe size 200 mm (8") and larger shall be welded black steel, and shall conform to AWWA C200, grade A, or
equivalent. Wall thickness shall conform to AWWA C200-97 Section 3-4. Minimum wall thickness shall be to BS
3600 [16] or as given in the Bill of Quantities.

D Steel pipe shall be round and straight and shall be free from injurious defects. Defects shall be considered
injurious when the depth of defect is greater than 12.5% of the tabulated wall thickness. Pipe shall be free from
rust.

E Fittings normally made from manufactured and tested pipes or fabricated by welding to AWWA C208. Material is
to be same nominal pressure

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 16


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F Steel pipes shall be joined by welding. All welding including surface preparation methods, welding procedures and
qualification of welders and welding operators shall be performed in conformance with AWWA C206 1997. .

G All steel pipes and specials shall be lined internally to the thickness specified with concrete made from ordinary
Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 [3] and fine aggregate. The materials used for lining, the method of lining and
curing of the finished lining and the manufacture and testing of test cubes shall comply with BS 534 [17] and shall
be carried out to the approval of the Engineer.

H Steel pipes, fittings and specials shall be protected externally with bituminous laminate tape 1.6 mm thick and with
55% overlap or as recommended by the manufacturer.

7.2 Testing on Steel Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on steel pipes delivered to site. The test report of the third party inspection shall
cover at least the following tests all as specified by International Standards.

I. Visual inspection

II. Pipe wall thickness

III. Weld seems

IV. Tensile strength

V. Hydrostatic testing

VI. Lining thickness

VII. Composition and thickness of external coating

8. Polyéthylène HDPE Pressure Pipe

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 17


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A Use HDPE pipes PN 10 or 16. Pipes and fittings shall be to SASO 1401, ISO 4427, DIN 8074/8075 or AWWA
C906-99. Pipe 60m shall be supplied in straight pieces and not rolled on a drum. The ends of each pipe shall be
plain and suitable for heat fusion. Pipe and fittings shall be class 10 or 16 kg/cm2.

B Materials used shall have a standard PE code designation 3408 and a minimum hydrostatic design basis of 1600
psi (or 180 kg/cm2) according to AWWA C906 Table 1.

C Manufacturers shall provide certification that stress regression testing has been performed on the pipe products.
Materials shall also meet elevated temperature requirements as given in Table 2 AWWA C906.

D Fittings shall be to AWWA C906, extruded or injection moulded suitable for class of pipe required.

E Joints for pipes and fittings shall be by butt fusion or by socket fusions and in strict accordance with pipe
manufactures recommendations. Joints shall have a tensile strength equal to that of the pipe. Fusion temperature,
interface pressure, alignment and cooling time, shall be according to manufactures recommendations.
F Tests on PE compounds: Where PE is used for potable water, PE compounds in pipes and fittings shall contain no
ingredients in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. PE
compounds shall be tested and certified suitable for potable water by the

National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Testing Laboratory – USA, or the Canadian Standard Association (CSA)
Testing Laboratory, or other accredited testing agency. Tests shall be made in accordance with requirements no less
restrictive than those in the NSF Standard No. 14 (1976), Sections 3 and 4. The seal and mark of the testing
laboratory shall be included on pipes and fittings.

8.1 Tests on HDPE Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on samples from every batch of pipes delivered to site by the third party inspection.
The test report of the third party inspector shall cover at least the following tests all as specified and indicated by SASO
ISO or DIN standards.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 18


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. Visual inspection

II. Wall thickness

III. Out of roundness

IV. Hydrostatic strength at 20˚ and 80˚ C

V. Longitudinal reversion / shrinkage test

VI. Tensile properties

VII. Visual inspection

VIII. Thermal stability – oxidation induction time

IX. Environmental stress crack resistance

X. Density

9. Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Pipe for Utility Liquid Service

A Use GRP pipe minimum stiffness 5000 N/m2 for transmission line outside cities for diameters 400 mm and greater
and working pressure not exceeding 10 or 16 bars.

B Pipes and fittings shall be to BS 5480, 1990 [11] or AWWA C950-01 or equivalent.

C Pipe and fittings shall include a corrosion resistant liner, a structural wall and a resin rich exterior surface.

D The liner shall have a nominal thickness of 1.0 mm. The liner surface shall be reinforced with "C" glass. The
remainder of the liner thickness shall be reinforced with an acid resistant chopped "E" glass strand or mat.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 19


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E The pipe structural wall shall consist of glass reinforcement, and fine silica sand, all impregnated with resin. The
fine silica sand shall be added to the structural layer to achieve the design thickness for the required stiffness
specified such that the overall hoop flexural modulus (E) for pipe is not less than 24 GN/m2. Silica sand and filler
content shall not exceed 50%.

F Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich outer layer reinforced with one layer of "C" glass veil. The exterior layer
shall have a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm. The layer shall be resin rich and reinforced with one layer of C glass.

G The resin used for the corrosion resistant liner of the pipe and fittings shall be high grade polyester resin (is
phthalic or better) type. For the structural wall and exterior layer of the pipe a high grade is phthalic polyester resin
shall be used. No dark pigments shall be used in the pipe or fittings.

H All glass reinforcements except for the inner and outer surfaces of the pipe and fittings shall be of the "E" type.
Surface reinforcement shall be of the "C" glass type.

I Pipes shall be designed for a life of not less than 50 years. Contractor shall submit calculations for initial and long
term deflection with Truck loads, Buckling, Vacuum, Pressure Class, and Strain in accordance with Appendix "A"
of AWWA, C-950-01 or equivalent. The maximum calculated long term deflection should not exceed 3%. Copies
of the design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

I. Stiffness: Minimum 5,000 N/m2. Suitability of stiffness shall be verified by Contractor for the various trench and

pipe laying conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure class 6 kg/cm2 minimum or as shown

on Drawings.

II. Longitudinal Strength: Conform to BS 5480 [11] table 2 or ASTM D3262 table 7.

III. Hoop strength shall according to ASTM D3517 Table 8.

IV. Strain corrosion resistance tests shall be carried out as per ASTM D 3681 or BS 5480 strain corrosion value at 50

years to equal or exceed 0.7%.

V. Markings shall be to BS 5480 [11] clause 11.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 20


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

VI. Joints shall be GRP double socket couplings with rubber rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10]. The allowable

angular deflection shall conform to the requirements of BS 5480 [11] Table 3.

J Testing on GRP Pipes: The following tests shall be carried out on manufactured pipes. Details of testing program
shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to commencement of pipe manufacture. The
manufacturer quality control scheme shall be to BS 5750-8 [12] or ISO 9004. Guidance on quality control and
sampling shall be BS 5480 Appendix Q [11]. At least the following

K tests shall be carried out and reported for approval.

I. Visual inspection

II. Longitudinal Strength: to ASTM D3262

III. Hydraulic Test: to ASTM 3517.

IV. Stiffness: to ASTM D 2412 or BS 5480 [11]

V. Wall Thickness: to BS 5480 [11]

VI. Diameter: to BS 5480 [11]

VII. Hardness: to ASTM 2583

VIII. Loss of Ignition: to ASTM D 2584

IX. Hoop Tensile: to ASTM 3517

10. PIPES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

10.1 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

10.1.1 Pipe Bedding

A Pipe bedding material shall be as specified in section 2.04.5 of Division 2 herein before

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 21


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B Type of Bedding shall be as indicated on the Drawings

10.1.2 Pipe Laying and Jointing - Generally

A The pipe shall be brought to grade and approved prior to the lowering of the pipe into the trench. Pipes shall be
laid to slopes shown on drawings.

B Lowering of pipes into the trench shall be carried carefully in a manner that does not cause damages to the pipes
or trench itself. Lowering pipes shall be carried out using ropes, wire slings, band slings, spreader beams etc. as
recommended by manufacturer for each type of pipe and as approved.

C All material shall be carefully examined for damage and tested in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
before laying to the satisfaction of Engineer.

D The Contractor shall examine material to ensure internal coating or lining and outer coating or sheathing are
undamaged. If damaged, make good or dispose of as directed.

E Pipe Cleanliness: The Contractor shall remove dirt and other materials before lowering, and shall clear
construction debris from inside of pipe before making joint.

F Pipe Placement: The Contractor shall lay pipes on even formations true to grade and line, with sockets (if any)
facing up the gradient.

G Pipe on Solid Ground: The Contractor shall cut holes in bottom of trench to allow proper jointing and for barrel of
pipe to bear evenly on the bedding for its full length.

H Pipe on Granular Bedding: The Contractor shall scoop out locally at sockets/couplings to enable pipe to rest
uniformly on barrel and adjust to exact line and level. After testing the Contractor shall lay and compact further
granular material in 150 mm layers or as approved to levels shown on the Drawings.

I Pipe on Concrete Bed or Surround: The Contractor shall provide rectangular blocks of concrete Class 210/25,
made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use, and hardwood folding wedges approved

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 22


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

J by the Engineer and also provide two concrete blocks for each pipe, set and bone into correct level on formation
bottom and lay pipe properly centred and socketed. The Contractor shall insert two hardwood folding wedges of
width equal to width of concrete block between body of pipe and block and drive together until pipe is brought to
exact level required and leave blocks and wedges undisturbed while pipes are being jointed and concrete bed and
haunch or surround are being placed.

The Contractor shall ensure blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of pipe
and leave sufficient space to enable joints to be made, tested and inspected.

K Pipe Plugs: When pipe laying is not in progress, the Contractor shall close open ends of pipes with properly fitted
temporary wooden plugs or standard caps as directed.

L Pipe minimum cover shall be 1.0 m unless specified by drawings or Engineer directions.

10.1.2.1 Jointing

A Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed regarding placement of bedding and backfilling, cleanliness of joint
surfaces, lubricant used, correct location of components, provision of correct gaps between end of spigot and back
of socket for flexible joints etc.

B Deflection of Joint: The Contractor shall not deflect flexible joints beyond 50 percent maximum permissible angles
given by manufacturer and/or relevant Standard.

C Patent Detachable and Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall strictly comply with special instructions issued by
manufacturers of proprietary joints when laying and jointing.

D Differing Pipe and Fitting Material: The Contractor shall joint with adaptors as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.

10.1.2.2 Line and Gradient

A In Open Excavation: The Contractor shall provide and maintain sight rails and boning rods properly painted to
ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be positioned either vertically above the lines of pipes or

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 23


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

immediately adjacent thereto. At no time are there to be less than three sight rails in position on each length of
pipeline under construction to any one gradient.

B Wherever possible and as per the Engineer instructions the Contractor should use the suitable recent surveying
devices to adjust the line and gradient of pipelines.

C In heading the Contractor shall provide and maintain marks to establish line and level of pipeline. Marks shall be
fixed in each working shaft and two further marks established in each length of heading.

10.1.2.3 Floatation

A Prevention: Whenever water is excluded from interior of pipe the Contractor shall place sufficient backfill above
pipe to prevent floatation.

B Removal of Pipe: The Contractor shall correct bedding and relay any pipe that has floated.

10.1.2.4 Pipe Built into Structures

A Treatment of External Surface: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean outside surface of pipes to be built-in
immediately before installation and remove protective coating to metal pipes, where ordered. The Contractor shall
roughen clay and concrete pipes as directed and paint plastic pipes with appropriate solvent cement and sprinkle
with dry coarse sand whilst wet. The Contractor shall cut away sheathing from sections to be built-in and after
installation restore protection up to external face of structure with approved bituminous material.

B Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall install two flexible joints or flexible patented joints adjacent to structures and
place the first joint not more than one pipe diameter from face of structure and second not more than the following
distances away from first:

I. Pipelines Not Exceeding 450 mm: 2 pipe diameters


II. Pipelines Over 450 mm and Not Exceeding 1000 mm: 1.2 m
III. Pipelines Over 1000 mm: 1.8 m.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 24
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C In general, the length of the short pieces may be selected as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

11. PIPE WORK TESTING

11.1 Field Testing: Generally

A Provision of Test Equipment: All items for test have to be provided on site before the test i.e pressure gauges,
instruments, water etc...

B The Contractor shall carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer.

C Fittings and Joints: The Contractor shall permanently anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints exposed for
checking.

D Test Sections: The Contractor shall limit test sections to not more than 500 m.

E Test Sections: The Contractor shall test pressure lines between valve chambers whenever possible.

F Test Sections: No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing valves. The setting of the
pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing purposes.

G Test Plug: The Contractor shall secure end of main and test plug by struts.

H Closed Valve: The Contractor shall not test against a closed valve unless there is no acceptable alternative.

I The Contractor shall apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter mains, by
power driven test pump, if approved.

J The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 25


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

K Failure: Should a test fail, the Contractor shall locate the leak and replace or make good defective pipe or replace
and make good faulty joint. The Contractor shall retest main.

L Records: The Contractor shall keep test records in an approved form and hand original copy to the Engineer
immediately after completion of test.

M Pressure Lines: The Contractor shall carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is partially backfilled.

11.1.1 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines

A The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the lowest point. After filling with water, absorbent pipes
shall be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before testing to allow for complete absorption.

B Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurizing shall then proceed until the specified test pressure is reached in
the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while the
pressure is being raised.

C Hydrostatic testing Pressure shall conform to (AWWA C500) specifications, and the testing pressure should
be equal to 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure for the pipeline as per the Site Engineer directions
without exceeding 75% of manufacture hydrostatic pressure.

D The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by pumping using a separate test pump. Pumping shall
then be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line shall be re-pressurized to the original test
pressure and the volume of water pumped into the line recorded.

E The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if visible leaks are detected (regardless of leakage being
within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of water pumped to restore original test pressure after the
period when pumping was stopped exceeds or 0.1 litre/day per km of pipe per mm of pipe diameter for each
3 kg/ cm2 of applied pressure for other pipe material.

11.1.2 Visual Inspection Test

A Timing: The Contractor shall carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 26


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B Limit of length to be tested at one time is three full- length pipes unless otherwise approved.

C Apparatus: The Contractor shall use rubber tyred bogies that do not damage lining of pipe and an adequate
supply of electric lamps.

D The Contractor shall check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are correctly located.

E The Contractor shall check pipe barrel for visible cracks.

11.1.3 Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes

A The Contractor shall conduct deflection tests for GRP pipes as required by the Engineer at 3 stages. Deflection
shall be measured at the spigot end at mid point and at socket end.

I. Stage 1: At completion of primary backfill (deflection at this stage should be below 0.5%).

II. Stage 2: At final backfill (Maximum allowable deflection 2.5%).

III. Stage 3: Six months after final backfill (maximum allowable deflection 4.0%).

B Pipes not passing the deflection tests at stage 2 or stage 3 shall be removed and replaced.

11.3.4 Testing of Water Retaining Structures

A All water retaining structures such as reservoirs, tanks, basins ponds, regardless of the construction material,
lining or final surface treatment shall be tested or Water-tightness.

B Tightness testing shall be carried out according to ACI 350.1-01/350.1R-01.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 27


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C Allowable losses of water, after correction for evaporation, precipitation etc. shall be as set in the table below:

Type of structure Test and Criteria*


Tanks/Reservoirs/Channels/Conduits for HST-VIO & HST-NML
water or wastewater, Concrete or metal,
Open or covered (Stormwater Channels not
included)
Pressurized Tanks SHT-VIO & SHT-NML
PNT-VIO & PNT-NML
CPT-VIO & CPT-NML
As applicable or as directed
by the Engineer

 For designations refer to ACI 350.1 - 01/350.1 R-01.

D Notwithstanding satisfactory completion of the water absorption test, any leakage visible on the outside faces
of the structure shall be stopped. Any caulking or making good of cracks in the wall section shall, where
practicable, be carried out from the inside face, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E Upon completion of the test, the Contractor shall empty the structure, dispose of the contents and shall clean
the structure and any equipment therein of all deposits left by the water.

11.1.5 Flushing and Disinfection of Water Mains

A Procedure: To AWWA C651-92.

B The Contractor shall provide equipment, gauges, temporary connections and chlorine needed for flushing and
disinfection and arrange with the Employer to draw water from existing sources.

C Sections: The Contractor shall flush and disinfect mains in sections as directed by the Engineer.

D Draining: The Contractor shall use washout valves and fire hydrants to drain flushing and disinfecting water.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 28


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E First Flushing: Before commencing disinfection, the Contractor shall flush mains until effluent is clean and then
clean as directed. 1 to 2 times volume of pipe is usually required for such flushing.

F Type of Chlorine: The Contractor shall disinfect with chlorine gas or solutions of calcium hypochlorite or sodium
hypochlorite and agree with the Engineer on method of application.

G Initial dosing shall be 40-50 ppm.

H Contact period shall be 24 hours.

I Residual Chlorine: The Contractor shall measure residual chlorine by Orthotolidin test. Residual chlorine shall not
to be less than 5 ppm or the test shall be repeated as directed.

J Final Flushing: After disinfection, the Contractor shall reflush network until chlorine concentration in water leaving
main is less than 1 ppm.

K Tests: The Contractor shall perform bacteriological tests to AWWA C651-92, Section 9. Number of samples shall
be one per 1 km of main feeders and one per 0.25 km of distribution lines.

L Procedure after Cutting into Existing Main: To AWWA C651, Section 11.

11.1.6 Field Protection and Coating

A Iron Pipes: Polyethylene sleeving shall be to ANSI/AWWA C105, Section 4.1 or ISO 8180 or in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. Sleeving shall be heavy duty blue color polyethylene with a minimum thickness of
225 microns.

B Patented Detachable and Flexible Joints and Flanged Connections: The Contractor shall protect metal joints with
mastic compound and protective tape in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Minimum overlap shall
be 55% and the Contractor shall press out firmly all folds and irregularities.

11.1.7 Anti-Corrosion Tape

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 29


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A The tape shall consist of a PVC backing bonded to a self adhesive bituminous rubber compound with a total
thickness of approximately 1.65 mm.

B The plastic backing shall be extruded PVC and shall have an approximate thickness 0.35 mm.

C When the tape is to be applied with a 50-55 % overlap the tape shall have a “guide-line” printed down the center of
the tape to ensure accurate overlapping is achieved.

D The tape shall be black, cold applied complying with AWWA C209. The tape shall have the following minimum
properties:
i. Backing Thickness: 0.3 - 0.4 mm

ii. Backing Adhesive Thickness: 0.75 - 0.90 mm

iii. Tensile Strength: 14.8 N/mm2

iv. Adhesive Shear Strength: 0.10 N/mm2

v. Impact Resistance: > 20 drops

vi. Dielectric Strength: 20 kv

E Coatings and tapes shall be inspected prior to and after laying, and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any
defects. Any defective areas shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

11.1.8 Waterproofing of Structures

A Waterproofing of water retaining structures shall not be commenced until tested for water-tightness and found
satisfactory.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 30


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B The waterproofing compound shall penetrate and react with the concrete to form crystals that seal all
capillaries, tracts and shrinkage cracks in the concrete structure. The compound shall consist of a mixture of
chemicals, quartz, sand and cement supplied in powder form ready to mix with water. Application shall be
carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.

12. CATHODIC PROTECTION

12.1 General

A This Section includes passive catholic protection systems that use zinc anodes to protect steel piping.

12.1.1 Performance Requirements

A Engage a qualified corrosion engineer to design and supervise, test, and inspect installation of catholic
protection systems.

I. Design catholic protection for pipelines according to "The National Association of Corrosion Engineers
International (NACE)" RP0169.

II. Design catholic protection for metal underground storage tanks according to "The National Association of
Corrosion Engineers International (NACE)" RP0285.

B Select anodes and accessories relevant to level of protection. Design anodes for an estimated life of 15 years
before replacement.
C Survey site and determine soil or water corrosively (resistivity), current requirements, potential surveys, stray
currents, and water chemistry/corrosively (pH).

D Catholic protection systems shall provide protective potential that complies with referenced NACE standards.

E As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed cathodic protection, in accordance
with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.

F Measure structure-to-earth according to NACE RP0169, using one of the following 2 methods:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 31


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. 850-mV Negative Voltage: With catholic system in operation, measure a negative voltage of at least
minus 0.85 V between pipe and a saturated copper/copper-sulfate reference electrode contacting the
earth directly over pipe.

II. 100-mV Polarization Voltage: Determine polarization voltage shift by interrupting protective current and
measuring polarization decay. An immediate voltage shift will occur if protective current is interrupted.
Use voltage reading, after immediate shift, as base reading from which to measure polarization decay.
Measure at least a minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 mV between pipe and a saturated
copper/copper-sulfate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over pipe.
12.1.2 Submittals

12.1.2.1 Submit product data for each of the following items:

i. Anodes.
ii. Insulating flange sets.
iii. Casings, insulation, and seals.
iv. Dielectric unions.

12.1.2.2 Shop Drawings: Detail location of catholic protection equipment, devices, and outlets, with characteristics and
cross-references to products. Include calculations and details of anode designs. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details for attachments to other Work, and list of equipment and materials.

12.1.2.3 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Include
calculations of estimated life of anodes.

Zinc Anodes for Buried Service Type Z-1

a. 12.1.2.4 Comply with ASTM B 418, Type II. Chemical composition as percent of weight shall be as
follows:
I. Aluminum: 0.005 maximum.
II. Cadmium: 0.003 maximum.
III. Iron: 0.0014 maximum.
IV. Zinc: Remainder.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 32
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

12.1.2.5 Bare Anode Ingot Weight: 13.6 kg, 50 mm square and 760 mm long. Packaged weight of anode bag shall be 32
kg.

12.1.2.6 Anode Wires: Cables, with copper conductors, suitable for direct burial; not less than 6 mm² with PVC insulation
according to ASTM D 1248 and NEMA WC 5; long enough to extend to accompanying junction box without splicing.

12.1.2.8 Anode Backfill: Backfill materials packaged in water-permeable fabric sack or cardboard container. Anodes shall
be factory installed in packaged backfill using methods that result in dense packing of fill with factory-installed anode
spacers to ensure centering of anode in packaged anode backfill. Backfill material shall have the following chemical
composition by weight:
I. Hydrated Gypsum: 75 percent.

II. Bentonite Clay: 20 percent.

III. Anhydrous Sodium Sulfate: 5 percent.

IV. Wire and Cable

12.1.2.9 Direct-Burial Cable: Single-conductor Type HMWPE, insulated cable specifically designed for dc service in

catholic protection installations.

I. Conductor: Stranded, annealed, uncoated copper, complying with ASTM B 3 and ASTM B 8.

II. Insulation: High-molecular-weight polyethylene, complying with NEMA WC 5.

III. Minimum Average Thickness of Insulation: 2.8 mm for 10 mm2 through 35 mm2, and 3.2 mm

IV. for 50 mm2 through 120 mm2; rated at 600 V.

V. Connectors: Copper compression type or exothermic welds.

12.1.2.10 Cables for Installation in Conduit: Type PVC copper conductors as specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors
and Cables."

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 33


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Conduit
Rigid galvanized steel as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

12.1.2.1.1 Test and Junction Boxes

A Junction Boxes: Waterproof; PVC as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

B Test Stations: Flush-mounting type of high-impact-resistant PVC or polycarbonate, with watertight conduit
connections and cover and removable terminal board.

12.1.2.1.2 Patch, Seal, and Repaired Coating

A Sealing and Dielectric Insulating Compound: Black, rubber based, soft, permanently pliable, tacky, moldable,
and unpacked; 3 mm thick.

B Coating Compound: Cold-applied, coal-tar-based mastic.

C Pressure-Sensitive, Vinyl-Plastic Electrical Tape: Comply with UL 510.

12.1.2.1.3 Potting Compound

A Cast-epoxy, two-package type; fabricated for this purpose and covered with heat-shrinkable tape.

12.1.2.1.4 Identification Materials

A Materials are specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

i. Wire and Cables: Laminated-plastic material with black letters on yellow background. Include I
identifier legend on the Shop Drawings.
ii. Cable Warning Tape: Polyethylene tape.

12.1.3. Insulating Flange Sets

12.1.3.1 Description: Insulating flange sets rated for operation at indicated pressure and temperature of

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 34


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Piping system, with full-faced gaskets, insulating sleeves and washers, and steel washers.
I. Gaskets: ASME B16.21. Neoprene-faced phenolic material.
II. Insulating Washers and Sleeves: 2 sets of laminated phenolic insulating material. Select washers to fit
Within bolt facing on flange over the outside of fabric-reinforced phenolic sleeve.
III. Washers: Steel, cadmium plated, to fit within bolt facing on flange.

12.1. 3.2 Steel Flanges and Bolts

A Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5; 68 kg.

B Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade B for bolts; ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 2 for nuts.

I. Dimensions: ASME B18.2.1 for bolts; ASME B18.2.2 for nuts.

II. Threads: ASME B1.1; Class 2A fit for bolts, Class 2B fit for nuts.
III. Extend bolts completely through nuts.
IV. Bolts may have reduced shanks of diameter not less than diameter at roof of threads.

12.1.3.3 Dielectric Unions

Description: ASME B16.39, Class [1] [2] for dimensional, strength, and pressure requirements. Include insulation
barrier that limits galvanic current to 1 percent of short-circuit current in a corresponding metallic joint and has
insulating material impervious to material in pipe.

12.1.3.4 Flexible Pipe Coupling Bonds

Description: Flexible copper straps with electrical resistance equal to 50 mm2 stranded copper wire and with 5 holes
for 5 exothermic welds to pipe.

12.1.3.4 Exothermic Welds

A Exothermic Weld Kits: Specifically designed by manufacturer for welding materials and shapes required.

B Exothermic Weld Caps: Dome of high-density polyethylene, 0.254 mm minimum thickness, filled with mastic and
containing a tunnel portion to separate lead wire from exothermic weld.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 35
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

12.1. 3.5 Zinc Anode and Cable Installation

A. Install zinc anode horizontally in a whole at least 76 mm larger than anode. Install anode under new copper water
tubing, including service lines, blow offs, and air releases. Separate piping and anode by at least 600 mm, but
not more than 1500 mm.
B Install anode midway between both ends of piping. Install anode wire in piping trench and connect to piping at an
accessible location. Install anode wire in PVC conduit where rising out of the ground to the aboveground
connection.
C Install conduit according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." Minimum conductor size is 6 mm2.
D Install direct-buried cables according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

i. Minimum Conductor Size: 10 mm2.

12.1.3.6 Test Stations

A Install test stations as follows:


I. At 300-m intervals.

II. At insulating joints.

III. At both ends of casings.

IV. Where pipe crosses other metal pipes.

V. Where pipe connects to existing piping system.

VI. Where pipe connects to dissimilar metal pipe.

B Install test stations on controlled backfill complying with requirements for trench bottom fill for anode wires,
unless otherwise indicated.

12.1.3.7 Insulating Flange Sets

A Cut piping and install flanges without stressing piping. Weld flanges according to ASME B16.25. Cover flanges
with sealing and dielectric compound.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 36


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

12.1.3.8 Pipe Joints


A Electrical Continuity: Install bonding straps on metallic pipe to and across buried flexible couplings, mechanical
joints, and flanged joints, except at places where insulating joints are specified. Welded and threaded joints are
considered electrically continuous. Size bonding strap to allow for a total of 25 mm pipe expansion or contraction.
Connect bonding strap to pipe, coupling follower rings, and coupling middle ring or sleeve. Connect bonding strap
to pipe and coupling with 5 thermowelds.

B Insulating Unions: Install electrical isolation at each building entrance and at other locations indicated. Cut pipe
ends square, remove fins and burrs, and cut tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Apply joint
compound or thread tape to male threads only. Install piping without stressing pipe. If joints are backed off to
permit alignment of threaded joints, reapply joint compound or tape. Engage threads so not more than three
threads remain exposed. Cover unions with sealing and dielectric compound.

12.1.3.9 Dissimilar Metals

A Underground Dissimilar Piping: Install electrically isolated joints for new and existing steel piping, except valves.
Coat insulating joint and pipe with sealing and dielectric compound for a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters
on both sides of joint.

B Underground Dissimilar Valves: Coat dissimilar ferrous valves and pipe with sealing and dielectric compound for
a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters on both sides of valve.

C Aboveground Dissimilar Pipe and Valves: If dissimilar metal pipe joints and valves are not buried and are
exposed only to atmosphere, coat connection or valve, including pipe, with sealing and dielectric compound for a
minimum distance of three pipe diameters on both sides of junction.

13 Casings, Insulation, and Seals

A. If piping is installed in casing, insulate piping from casing and seal annular space to prevent intrusion of
Water.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 37


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

14 Reconditioning of Surfaces

A Sod Restoration: Restore grass and lawn surfaces disturbed during installation of anodes and wires to their
original elevation and condition. Preserve sod and topsoil and replace after backfilling is completed. If surface is
disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed area with same quality and formula of seed as that used in original
seeding.

B. Pavement Restoration: Repair pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters if removed or disturbed during
Construction.
Saw cut pavement edges. Graded aggregate base course shall have a maximum aggregate size of 40
mm. Before
Paving, prime base course with liquid asphalt, Grade RC-70, complying with ASTM D 2028.

I. Match base course to existing thickness, but not less than 150 mm.

II. Asphalt Aggregate Size: 13 mm.

III. Asphalt Cement: Comply with ASTM D 3381, Grade AR-2000.

IV. Match asphalt concrete to existing thickness, but not less than 50 mm.

V. Repair Portland cement concrete pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters using 21-MPa

concrete, complying with ASTM C 94. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Match

existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, and gutter thicknesses.

15 Identification

A Identify test station as indicated on the Shop Drawings.

16 Field Quality Control

A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency acceptable to the Engineer, to perform the following field
Quality-control testing:

B Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing under the supervision of a qualified
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 38
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Corrosion engineer:

I. Static Pull Test: Choose, at random, one completed anode of each type for this destructive test.
Demonstrate that anode wire connections have enough strength to withstand a minimum tensile load of
136 kg. If test fails, replace all anodes and repeat test at another randomly selected anode.
II. Insulation Testing: Before anode system is connected to pipe, test insulation at each insulating joint and
fitting. Demonstrate that no metallic contact, or short circuit, exists between the two insulated sections
of pipe and tank. Replace defective joints or fittings.

III. Baseline Potentials: After backfilling of pipe, and anodes is completed, but before anodes are connected
to pipe, measure the static potential of pipe to soil. Record initial measurements.

IV. Anode Output: Measure electrical current as anodes or groups of anodes are connected to pipe. Use a
low-resistance ammeter. Record current, date, time, and location of each measurement.

V. Pipe to-Reference Electrode Potential Measurements: On completion of installation of entire catholic


protection system, make electrode potential measurements using a copper/copper-sulfate reference
electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter, or a dc voltmeter with an internal resistance (sensitivity) of not
less than 100,000 ohms per volt

I. And a full scale of 1 or 2 V. Make measurements at same locations as those used for baseline
potentials. Record voltage, date, time, and location of each measurement.

C. Location of Measurements for Piping: For coated piping or conduit, measure from reference electrode in contact
with the earth directly over pipe. Measure at intervals not exceeding 120 m. Make additional measurements at
each distribution service riser, with reference electrode placed directly over service line.

D. Casing Tests: Test insulation between carrier pipe and casing. Correct short circuits.

E. Interference Testing: Test interference with catholic protection from any foreign [pipes] in cooperation with the
Employer of foreign [pipes]. Report results and recommendations.

17 Adjusting and Demonstration

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 39


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A. Adjust catholic current using resistors as recommended by the Corrosion Engineer.

B. During first year after Substantial Completion, test, inspect, and adjust catholic protection system every 3
months to ensure its continued compliance with specified requirements.

II. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain catholic protection system installation.

18. VALVES and Hydrants for Water Utility Service

18. 1 GENERAL

18.1.1 Scope

A. A.1 these works shall consist of furnishing all materials, constructing, installing and completing in all respects of
works described in this Specification and indicated on the Drawings.

18.1.2 VALVES

19. Gate Valves Cast Iron

A. Type: Gate valves shall be used for diameters from 50 mm to less than 300mm and shall be of Ductile Cast Iron
(Ductile Cast Iron GGG40) to DIN3202 or equivalent and anti corrosive cast iron operation stem which does not
rise during operation (Non rising Stem) and the gate in made of copper or cast iron covered with rubber.

B. Type: socket ends for diameters below 150 to BS 5163 or equivalent and flanged ends for diameters 150 m and
greater (in valve chambers) to BS 4504 or equivalent or ISO3606 and ISO4422 or equivalent.

C. Material of component for socket and flanged valves:

I. The valve body from ductile cast iron to (GGG40) (EN –JS1030).

II. The gate is covered totally with rubber.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 40


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

III. Valve non-rising stem from Stainless steel. The valve is operated either directly by hard wheel or by a

spindle.

IV. Testing of valves is done as per specification o DIN 3230 or EN 12266 – Part

4 or equivalent.

D. Operation is either by hand-wheel or by spur gear drive operated by removable key with a rising stem depending
on the depth of installation which may require inner gear as per Engineers or manufactures direction.

E. Protection Type: Painting inner and outer surfaces by epoxy with a thickness not less than 250 microns as per
specifications.

20. Butterfly Valves:

A. Type: Butterfly valves flanged on both sides with a pressure 10/16 Bars shall be used for diameters greater or
equal to 300 mm manufactured to comply with EN593 specification or equivalent.

B. Components:

I. Butterfly value is of the fixed plate type not coaxial with the stem.

II. Valve body is manufactured form ductile cost iron (GGG-40).

III. Valve length is to comply with DIN3202 F4 series 14 and EN558-1 or equivalent.

IV. Valve stem is of anticorrosion cast iron.

V. Flanges are to comply with DIN2501 or equivalent.

VI. Valve is opened and closed via the gear box mounted on the valve.

C. Operation by hand-wheel.
D. Protection Type: Painting the inner and exterior surfaces by epoxy with a thickness not less than 250 microns as
per specification.

21. Check Valves:


SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 41
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

21.1.1 Check valves for sizes 50-250 mm will be equipped with a gate that will open horizontally compatible to an operation
pressure 10/16 Bars.

21.1.2 Material of component parts: Valve body of cast iron (GG25) to specifications of EN-JL 1040 or
Equivalent and the plate from cast iron or bronze, and the interacting parts between plate and base
Should be cooper to rubber or cupper to cupper.

21.1.3 Parts connection will be flanged as per DIN2501 specification or equivalent.

21.1.4 Protection type is by epoxy paint with a thickness not less than 250 micron as per specification.

21.1.5 Check valves for series greater than 300mm will be equipped with a stanted seat as per EN12334
Specification or equivalent for an operating pressure 10/16 bars.
21.1.6 Material of Component Parts:

I. Valve body and the plate is of ductile coast iron GGG-40 as or EN-JS1030 specification or equivalent.

II. Valve stem is of stainless steel (I-4021).

III. Closing base between valve and plate shall have welded Nickel.

21.1.7 Parts Connection shall be flanged as pr specification DIN2501 or equivalent.

21.1.7 Protection type is by epoxy paint with a thickness not less than 250 microns as per specification.

21.1.8 Shocks Absorption Unit

Valves shall be suitable to be equipped with shocks absorption units that works hydraulically by valve which will be the
media to absorb shocks. Generally these instruments are installed on valve sizes greater than 400 mm.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 42


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

22. Flap Valves

22.1 It is valve to prevent backflow installed at pipe ends.

A. Type: To be flange mounted, designed for use on end closures to prevent entrance of backwater. Seating plane is
to have 10 deg. inclination.

B. Materials: Cast iron body and cover, bronze seat faces, bronze hinge pins and spring pins, cast iron follow ring
and plated steel ring draw bolts. Materials subject to de- zincification or de-aluminuzation are not to be used.

C. End Connections: If flange mounted, flanges are to be toDIN2501 or equivalent.

D. Factory Protection: Painting surfaces with epoxy with layers not less than 250 microns as per specification.

23. Float Valves

A. Globe pattern mounted horizontally or vertically used to control water level in tanks.

B. Control and operation shall be done through the valve external floater depending on water level in the tank.

C. Valve positioning control consists of float operated linkage mechanism for remote mounting which feeds water
level changes back to main valve through low friction, flexible push-pull cable supplied by same manufacturer.

D. Construction: Cast iron body (GGG-40) to ASTM A126 or equivalent, bronze valve trim and valve operating
mechanism to ASTM B62 and all stainless steel valve float and pilots.

E. Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to a thickness of at least 250 microns and external coating of epoxy
and nickel plating to a thickness of at least 250 microns.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 43


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

24. Air Valves for Water Mains

A. Generally: Valves are to have ductile cast iron body (GGG-40) to EN-JS 1030 or equivalent and bolted cover
rubber outlet seat, plastic or stainless ball. Valves are to be dynamic type where there is no possibility of ball
being drawn into orifice due to high air velocities. Valves are to be factory tested to 1.5 times working pressure
and factory coated with epoxy to BS 4164 [5] or BS 3416 [4] respectively. Thickness of coat to be at least 250
microns.

B. Double Air Valves (or Combination Air Valves): These are required for relieving air under pressure and in bulk.
Large orifice releases or admits air during charging or emptying of mains while small orifice releases air
accumulated at summits of mains under pressure. Large orifice area is to be equal to or greater than inlet of
valve. Valves are to be fitted with nitrite rubber lined butterfly valve with nylon coated disc on stainless steel shaft
operated by lever handle with indicator and locking thumb screw. Valves are to be flanged to BS 4504 [2] or
DIN2501 or equivalent (PN16) and suitable for working pressures up to NP16.

C. Single Air Valves: Type 1 (or air / vacuum valve) for releasing or admitting air during filling or emptying of pipes.
Type II (or air release valve) for automatically releasing, under pressure, accumulated air at summits of mains. Air
valves larger than 50 mm are to be flanged to BS 4504 [2] or DIN2501 or equivalent and are to have nitrite rubber
lined butterfly valve or gate valve with nylon coated disc on stainless steel shaft operated by lever handle with
indicator and locking thumb screw. Air valves 50 mm and smaller are to have B.S.P. thread with brass or gun
metal male screwed stop valves. Valves are to be suitable for working pressures up to NP16.

25. Sluice Gates / Penstock

A. Material of Component Parts: Manufactured of stainless steel and insulation rings from EPDM and may be
circular, rectangular or squared.

B. Operation: By hand-wheel or stainless steel stem and may be operated by electric motor as per specification or
Engineers directors.

C. Protection: shall be manufactured from stainless steel (1.4301) or (1.4571) as per specifications and manufacturer
directions.

26. Pressure Reducing Valves - Generally

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 44


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A. Types: Installed where shown on the Drawings to pressure ratings and pressure settings indicated, to
automatically reduce higher inlet pressure to steady lower downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate
and/or varying inlet pressure. Valves are to be high pressure rating piston type and hydraulic pilot operated type.
B. Accessibility: Maintenance is to be possible without removing valve from pipeline.

C. Material of component: valve shall be to (DIN3202) F1 or (ISO5752 series 1) or equivalent and the valve body and
cover are of cast iron GGG-40 and the value base and disk from stainless steel.

D. End Connections: Flanged to DIN2501 or BS 4504 [2] to pressure rating of 10, 16 or 25 as appropriate and
provided from factory with necessary bolts, washers, nuts and gaskets.

E. Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to a thickness of at least 250 microns and external coating of epoxy
and nickel plating to a thickness of at least 250 microns.

27. Pressure Regulating Valves

27.1 Type:
One-way valve to control water pressure and water shall be identical around inner valve section and consisting of two
annular plates perforated identically and in the same manner with cone nozzles. Downstream plate is to be fixed and
upstream plate is to slide over fixed plate using a hand wheel.

27.2 Function:
These shall be used on by-pass of pump and on main pumping station by-pass line to limit differential pressure and water
flow across pump control valve and by-pass valve.

27.3 Construction:
Ductile Cast steel GGG-40 valve body, stainless steel fixed plate with 13% Cr., bronze aluminum sliding plate, stainless
steel valve shaft and perbuban 70 shore gaskets.

27.4 Accessories:
Hand-wheel is to have micrometric indicator to indicate valve position. Valve is to be designed for working pressure of 25
bars.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 45


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

27.5 Protection Type:


Interior and exterior layer of epoxy with a thickness at least 150 microns.

27.5.1 Over-speed Isolating Valves

27.5.1.1 Type:
Hydraulically controlled, butterfly valve opened by overhead hoist and closed by weight. Valves are to automatically shut-
off at rapid flow that may occur in case of pipe bursts or increase in water velocity above normal average.
27.5.1.2 Install where shown on the Drawings, to the size, pressure ratings and water flow closing settings
Shown.

27.5.1.3 Detection system shall comprise an apparels connected to control panel supplied with the valve to
Detect over speed.

27.5.1.4 Shut-off mechanism shall consist of mechanical and hydraulic oil system ensuring irrevocable shutting
Of valve when over speed is detected.

27.5.1.5 Construction: Valve body, disc and accessories are to be as specified for butterfly valves.

27.5.1.6 Accessories shall include necessary devices to provide controlled operation, shut-off delay, non-
Operation by temporary over speeding and remote signaling by limit switches. Closing speed shall be
Adjustable.

28. General Control and Operation Valves

A. General: Pump control valves, slow-closing slow-opening pump check valves, surge control valves, air release
and vacuum breaker valves and by-pass valves are to be automatic, hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, piston
actuated, single seated, globe or angle pattern as shown on the Drawings, consisting of valve body, piston
assembly and cover with the piston assembly as the only moving part. Valves are to be size and pressure rating
shown on the Drawings and are to be the product of one reputable approved manufacturer.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 46


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B. Construction: Valve body is to be ductile cast iron GGG-40 to EN-JS 1030standard, flanged, with flange rating as
shown on the Drawings and containing a removable seat insert.

C. Accessibility: Repairs are to be possible without removing valve from line. Valve is to have no external packing
glands or stuffing boxes.

D. Pilots: Valve shall be supplied complete with factory fitted pilot valves, small interconnecting piping and acces-
sories to perform required functions. Pilot control system is to be stainless steel to AISI type 303.
E. Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to a thickness of at least 250 microns and external coating of epoxy
and nickel plating to a thickness of at least 250 microns.

F. Design Data: The Contractor shall provide manufacturer with necessary and pertinent data for setting control
valves, at factory, to required settings to suit individual conditions of different pumping stations.

G. Shop Drawings And Instructions: Prior to shipping valves from factory, submit shop drawings for approval giving
factory settings, range of adjustments, control diagram, wiring diagram, size, arrangement and other pertinent data
necessary for approval by the Engineer of every control valve in the system. Submit with the shop drawings
detailed instructions for field adjustment and setting, installation, start-up and proper operation.

H. Factory Test: Each control valve is to be tested individually at factory and certified test results submitted.

I. Field Adjustment: The Contractor shall provide the services of a specialized factory technician or engineer to set,
test, adjust and commission the control valves as specified.

29. Washout Valve

A. Washout valves shall be gate valves as per flanged valves specifications, and shall be installed in valve
B. Chambers as indicated on drawings or as by Engineers direction.

I. Washout valves shall be installed at the lowest level in the main water as per drawings or Engineers
directions.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 47


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

30. HYDRANTS

30.1 FIRE HYDRANTS

30.1.1 General

A. These specifications shall corer fire hydrants installed on potable water pipes in the streets and shall be of above
ground hydrant type as to DIN 3222 specification or equivalent.

B. Fire hydrants shall be of Above Ground Type consisting of two separate parts connected by a flange in the middle,
and the bolts shall be designed in a manner that allow dismantling the upper part from the lower part, and in a way
that allows the fine hydrant to receive shocks without allowing breakage of the fine hydrant body or leakage of
water.

C. Fire hydrant shall be designed in a way that allows dismantling of inner parts such as rising stem, control valve for
maintenance needs without the need to dismantle the valve.

30.1.2. Scope

A. Sizing: The height of upper part of the fire hydrant shall not be less than 60 cm above ground, and the height of
buried part of fire hydrant shall not be less than 120 cm below ground level.

30.1.3 Parts

30.1.4 External Outlets shall be threaded in the upper part and the main internal nominal diameter shall be 4 inch and
The side outlets shall be 2.5 inch

30.1.5 Intermediate Plunge


Dimension of flange with respect to diameter and number of openings for upper part should be identical to those
In lower part.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 48


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

30.1.6 Lower Inlet

Water inlet in the lower part shall be with a hollow-end to hold a 100mm pipe, or the end should be flanged as
Per request with dimensions to international specifications ISO 2531 or equivalent.

30.1.4 Material of Parts

A. Fire Hydrant Body and Upper Cover

B. Fire hydrant body shall have the Barrel Body shape that surrounds inner parts and covered with a hydrant cap
supplied by an insulating rubber ring bonnet gasket.
C. The fire hydrant upper barrel part shall be of ductile cast iron (GGG40/50) to international or German or equivalent
specification.
D. The Bury standing pipe and the upper cap shall be of the best ductile cast iron type or ductile cast iron GG25.
E. The body and cap shall be coaled with epoxy on inside and outside surfaces with a layer of thickness at least 250
microns or what is equivalent from other types of anti-corrosive paints that does not react with water. The coating
shall be applied to clean surfaces form dusts or oil. The coating for the external upper part should be red color.

30.1.5 Stem

A. The stem shall connect the upper and lower part in such a way to control with it the opening and closing of the
regulating valve at the upper part of hydrant.

B. The stem shall be anti corrosive cast iron with chrome percentage not less than 13% and Bronze plates.

C. The stem shall be mounted in the regulating valve body through a copper nut in such a way where the opening
can be done in a counter lock wise way.

30.1.6 Outlet Nozzles

A. Unless otherwise stated, the fire hydrant shall be provided with 3 outlets, one main 4 inch and 2 side threaded 2.5
inch outlets

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 49


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B. All outlets shall be equipped with a metal cap connected to fire hydrant body in a suitable way through a chain
which allows rotation both way and do not make restrictions during opening and closing of cap.

30.1.7 Inlet Base

A. The lower part shall be supply be supplied with a Duck Food Bend with a socket end for a 100mm pipe or with a
flanged end as required.

B. The Dock Foot Bend shall be of ductile cast iron GGG-40/50.

30.1.8 Junction Diameter

A. The junction connecting the fire hydrant and the water main shall be 100 mm when the water main is 100mm.
The junction diameter shall be 150 mm when the water main size greater than 150 mm

30.1.9 Closing Valve

A gate valve shall be installed at a 1m distance from the fire hydrant and shall be to the specification of gate valves.

30.1.10 Over Flow and in Release System

A. The fire hydrant shall be supplied with a suitable system to drain water from the hydrant body and prevent it from
freezing when the hydrant is closed.

B. The hydrant shall be designed to empty entrapped air inside it through air release valve or any compatible system.

30.1.11 Installation of the Hydrants

A. The fire hydrants shall be installed as specified on plans or as per Engineer’s direction at easily accessible
locations and reduce any damages due to vehicles passage.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 50


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B. Fire hydrant shall be supplied with safety bars for protection from traffic accidents.

31. Water Utility Service Laterals (House Connection)

31.1 Water connection

A. Water connection shall constitute of saddle connection mounted on water line, connections, connection pipes,
water meter boxes, connections and any other item.

B. Locations and diameters of house connections, location of connections shall be as drawings and as Engineer’s
directions during project construction, and number and diameters that shall be installed as per drawing and bill of
quantities.

31.2 Connection Pipes

Domestic connection pipes shall be of high density polyethylene as mentioned in item (4.3.1) pressure
Category (10 BAR) or 10 Kg/cm2.

31.3 Connection to water main (saddle connection)

31.3.1 House connections shall be connected to water main through saddle as shown in drawings and as per Engineer’s
Direction.

31.3.2 Type of saddle that will be used in connecting house connection will be ductile iron in case the water main is
Ductile iron or from polyethylene as specified in case the water main or polyethylene.

31.3.3 The saddle connections will be installed as per drawings and manufacturers specification that should be applied
Precisely.

32. Water meter Boxes for house Connections

32.1 Water Meters

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 51


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Water meter shall be manufactured from an approved factory. The meters shall comply with the international standards
(ISO 4064-1) or American standards (AWWA) or SASO 238 and shall be accompanied by test certificate, certificate of
origin and shall comply with the following requirements:

A The water meter shall be of the metrological category Class- C. The dimensioning of the water meter shall comply
with the international dimensioning standards and shall be installed into two positions vertical and horizontal and
the reading precision shall not be less then Class-C.

B The water meter shall be made of non corrosive brass solder or bronze and shall not be affected by temperature
and bronze percentage shall not be less than 60%.

C All internal and external parts shall be salt and temperature resistant and temperature should be between 0 and
60 degrees and accompanied by a certificate and all submerged parts shall be made of non poisoned material so
that water properties (quality, taste and odor) are maintained.

D The water meter shall be resistant to high pressures (10 to 16 bars).

E Water meter shall be isolated from water line and evacuated from air and be of dry type.

F Water meter glass shall be firmly treated against breakage and scratch and color change.

G Each water meter shall have an external number that will be the meter number which will be inscribed on the
metal part of the meter and the year of manufacture shall be shown.

H The water meter shall be measured in meter cube and should not be less than 5 digits in addition to 3 decimal
places in different colors.

I The water meter material should be weather resistant and internal parts of meter should be resistant to sand and
water impurities.

J There shall be a guarantee for the availability of spare parts of the meter and its parts for a period not less than 10
years; during this period any part of the meter or its base or measuring chamber could be exchanged.

K The meter should be read clearly in addition to the possibility of being read remotely as per the Ministry circulation
No. 545/1 on 04/06/1428 h.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 52


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

L It should be printed on either side of the meter with big letters and numbers water meter size and the flow direction
with an arrow. Also the pins of the entrance shall be different than the exit. This will ensure that the meter will not
be installed wrongly.

M It should be ensured that the meter shall not be affected by the cut of water supply or being dry for a long time.

N Each meter shall have a non-corrosive screen installed at the meter entrance before the measuring instrument
and shall have a removable flap valve after the measuring instrument.

O The readings gears shall be fixed in a manner that is not affected by internal and external factors and shall be
suitable for the water quality and temperature that reach 60o C.

P All meter sizes up to 4 inch shall be available and the meter box shall be fixed with a lock that can be opened only
with a special key to avoid vandalism.

32.2 Meters Boxes

A Meter box body shall be made of fiberglass (25% glass).

B Box cover: the metal hinges are made of stainless steel that allow opening the box with an angle of 18 o.

C Reading opening made up of thermally treated glass to allow of taking clear readings with a guarantee that the
color will not change and shall be against scratch and resist temperature effects.

D Box Key: the locking pin of the box cover shall be of stainless steel which does not rust, and shall be opened by a
special key (imported quantity equal 5% of number of imported boxes) and the key shall be of stainless steel.

E Water pipe opening shall be 50 mm diameter in addition to two gaskets to fix the entering and exiting pipes.

F A circular opening to fix the reading instrument by a touching system with a 40 mm diameter.

G Ministry of water and electricity logo.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 53


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

H Bills collector fixed on the exterior side of the box made of polycarbonate, transparent and anti breakage or
scratch or color change.

I Box color is white (RAL9010). Box thickness is 6mm for all surfaces. Surfaces shall be resisting for all
environmental deteriorating factors and sunlight with a guarantee that color will not change or that the surface will
not deteriorate.

32.2.1 Ground water meter shall be put in ground boxes as shown in drawings. The frame and cover shall be prepared
To be locked and resist a load of 10 tons and shall be coated to specifications. And shall secure keys to open
and close these frames, one key for every 50 boxes.

33. Installation of house connections

The contractor shall clean site, excavate, backfill, install, and put the bedding for pipes and paving to the
specifications as in the main network.

34. Testing and Disinfecting House Connection

House connections shall be tested and disinfected to specifications and as done in the main network.

35. Files of House Connection Locations

The Contractor shall reserve accurate files for the locations of house connections showing diameter length and the
files shall be in a pre-specified format and available for revision and ready to be Submitted to the owner. The
contractor shall transfer the information into charts in accordance with the Engineer in addition to three copies that
shall be submitted to the owner.

36. JOINTING MATERIALS AND ADAPTORS

36.1 Generally

A Gaskets: Elastomeric full face 3 mm thick joint rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10] with dimensions to BS 3063
[38].

B Rings: Elastomeric to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10] with dimensions to manufacturer's recommendations to suit
type of joint required.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 54


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C Bolts and Nuts: ISO metric black hexagon to BS 4190 [39], minimum tensile strength 433 MN/m2, maximum
elongation 17%. After fixing, bolt projection shall to be maximum 6 mm, minimum 3 mm.

D Washers: Black steel shall be to BS 4320 [40] or ISO/R 887.

E Dielectric joints shall have insulating gasket between flanges and Teflon sleeves and washers between bolts and
nuts and flanges. Joints are to be suitable for operating pressure of system.

36.2 Flexible Couplings

36.2.1 Type:
Gasket sleeved type, to allow angular deflection and axial movement of two joined pipe ends and to maintain permanent,
leak-tight joint.

36.2.2 Components comprise one centre sleeve, two end followers or flanges, two rubber-compounded wedge-section
Gaskets and sufficient draw bolts and nuts to properly compress gaskets. Tightening of bolts to draw end followers
Together is to compress gaskets in recess between centre sleeve and followers onto pipe ends to effect positive
Seal.

36.2.3 Size:
Couplings are to have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type of joined pipe ends. Centre sleeve is to be
of adequate thickness and whole coupling suitable for minimum working pressures shown on the Drawings.

36.2.4 Centre Sleeve and Followers shall be true circular sections, free from irregularities, flat spots or surface defects
and formed from steel mill sections with space between sleeve and follower designed to provide confinement of
gasket.

36.2.5 Bolts shall be special steel having minimum yield strength of 2800 kg/cm2 (40,000 psi) and ultimate strength of
4200 kg/cm2 (60,000 psi). Bolts shall be track-head design to prevent turning when nut is drawn up and
Threads are to be rolled with a nominal diameter larger than diameter of shank. Manufacturer shall supply
Information regarding recommended torque to which bolts are to be tightened.

36.2.6 Gaskets shall be synthetic rubber-base compound with other products to produce material which will not

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 55


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Deteriorate from age, heat or exposure to air and which is resilient and able to resist cold flow of material so that
Joint will remain sealed and tight indefinitely when subjected to shock, vibration, pulsation, temperature and ad
dustmen of connected pipes.

36.2.7 Factory Protection: Coupling shall be factory painted internally with 10 mils coating of epoxy and externally with red
primer to AWWA 203 Type B chlorinated rubber solution compatible with bitumen, coal tar and general paints.

36.2.8 Installation: Couplings are to be assembled on site in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure
Permanently tight joints under all conditions of expansion, contraction, shifting and settlement.

36.3. Dismantling Couplings


36.3.1 Type
These shall ensure extensible connection between sections of pipework, to be mounted next to valves to enable
easy dismantling from pipework or to permit joining pipework when butterfly valve is removed for maintenance.

36.3.2 Components:
Dismantling piece shall be flanged type composed of two parts, one sliding into the other, and a free flange to
Compress a trapezoidal section seal to ensure water tightness. Coupling shall have locking devices to provide
elements of complete rigidity.

36.3.3 Construction:
All steel with flanges class PN 10, PN 16 or PN 25 depending upon coupling location on pipework.

36.3.4 Size:
Couplings shall have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type of joined ends of pipes and valves.
Coupling shall permit tightening of end flanges without risk of misalignment. Seal shall be locked after end joints are
Tightened.

36.4 Flanged Adaptor: Ferrous

A Material: Cast iron to BS EN 545 [1].

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 56


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B Length of adaptor shall be 200 mm for diameters up to 150 mm, 250 mm for diameters between 200 and 300 mm
and as approved for diameters larger than 300 mm.
C Factory Protection: Coated with bitumen or coal tar to BS 3416 [4] or 4164 [5] respectively.

37. VALVE ACCESSORIES

37.1 Accessories

A Hand-wheels shall be to BS 5163 [25], of cast iron to BS EN 1561 [29]. Hand-wheels are to be marked 'CLOSE'
with an arrow to indicate clockwise direction of closure. Diameters and other constructional details shall be to
manufacturer's standards. Hand-wheels are to be supplied at a rate of 1 in 5 valves.
B Valve caps shall be to BS 5163 [25], of cast iron or malleable iron to BS EN 1561 [29] and BS EN 1562 [41]
respectively. Set screw of valve cap is to be mild steel M12.

C Operation Keys: Combination prising bar and lifting key type, with 1.5 m vertical bar and 0.5 m horizontal bar.
Keys are to be supplied at a rate of 1 in 5 valves.

D Extension Spindles for Gate Valves Manufactured from: Steel to BS 2470 [42] - M12 for diameters less than
300mm. And the spindle will have manual key of T Type Protection Tubes: Cast iron. Shape, sizes and other
constructional details are to be to manufacturer's standards and/or as shown on the Drawings. Tubes are to have
caps circling extension spindles.

E Surface boxes shall be to BS 5834 [43] Part 2. Frames and lids are to be cast iron to BS EN 1561 [29], studs,
bolts, nuts and hinge pins are to be mild steel M12, chains are to be mild steel or wrought iron and lid is to have
the letter 'W' cast on. Boxes are to be of the following types:

i. For carriageways (wheel loads


up to 11.5 tons) : Heavy grade type A

ii. For use where heavy commercial


vehicles are exceptional (7 tons) : Medium grade type M

iii. For use in places inaccessible


to wheeled vehicles (2.5 tons) : Light grade type L

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 57


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F Lifting Key Sets: Malleable iron, supplied at the rate of 1 per 5 covers installed or fraction thereof.
G Guards for Underground Stop Valves: PVC, shape and size and other constructional details to manufacturer's
standards and/or as shown on the Drawings.

37.2 Valve Chambers and Markers

A Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings all backflow preventers, gate valves, pressure regulators, electric
solenoid valves, manual control valves, pressure gauges and water meters shall be installed in chambers of
suitable size for easy access. Chambers shall be complete with access covers, ladder rungs and other
incidental works.

B Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings all chambers shall be installed on a suitable base for proper
foundation and easy leveling to proper grade, and also to provide for sufficient drainage.

C Valve markers showing the reference numbers of the valves shall be of materials and to the dimensions,
shapes and details as shown on the Drawings.

38. VALVE OPERATORS

38.1 General

A Gate, butterfly and ball valves are to be manually or electrically operated depending upon size, torque applied on
valve stem or as shown on the Drawings.
B Valves 350 mm and smaller are to be operated manually with a maximum applied torque on handwheel of 100 Nm

C Valves 400 – 500 mm are to be operated manually with a maximum applied torque of 150 Nm

D Valves of higher torque are to have appropriate thrust bearings, slides and gearboxes to fulfill these requirements

E Gate valves 600 mm and larger and ball valves are always electrically operated using thrust bearings, gearboxes
and motor actuators

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 58


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F Butterfly valves 600 mm and larger are to be either manually or electrically operated as shown on the Drawings.

38.2 Manual Gearboxes

38.2.1 Type:
Totally enclosed, sealed construction to protect moving parts from damage and corrosion. Gearbox is to be either spur or
level type depending upon mounting position of valve.

38.2.2 Components shall include corrosion resistant bearings, and gearbox of cast iron or aluminum with unpermeabile
Cover. Housing cover is to have indicator window to show position of valve. Gearbox is also to have stainless
steel bolts.

38.3 Electric Valve Operators

38.3.1 Type:
These shall consist of suitable gearbox and electric motored hand wheel for manual operation.

38.3.2 Installation shall be suitable for flange mounting directly on valve body, for gate valves the operating shall be of
non rising stem type.

38.3.3 Rating shall be of adequate horse-power and thrust ratings to open and close operated valve smoothly at all
Conditions of load and pressure.

38.3.4 Components shall include adjustable mechanical stop- limiting devices to prevent over-travel of valve in either
Direction. In addition, components will include safety key to prevent increase in rotation momentum.

38.3.5 Construction: Weatherproof, with rugged cast iron housing and with hand wheel having appropriate gearing for
Emergency manual operation such that maximum applied torque is 150 Nm. Declutch lever is to disengage drive
Motor during hand wheel operation and prevent hand wheel rotating during power operation for safety of personnel.
Hand wheels are to close valve in counter clockwise direction and are to have arrows and the word 'CLOSE' cast
on.

38.3.6 Controls shall comprise integral electric controls enclosed within weatherproof compartment and including mag

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 59


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Noetic starter and reversing controller for motor, open-stop- close push-button for local operation, and switches for
Manual or remote operation with indication of operator condition.

38.3.7 Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type conforming to NEMA Publication No. MG1 including
Characteristics, tests and ratings. Motor shall carry maximum possible load encountered in valve operation under
All normal and abnormal operating conditions.

39. CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

39.1 Generally

A Prior to Installation, the Contractor shall inspect for cleanliness of bores, seating surfaces etc. and for handling
damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of pressure-containing bolting.
B The Contractor shall ensure gates and hydrants are in closed position before installation.

C Operate hydrants through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which they are to be installed
to ensure proper functioning.

39.2 Installation of Valves

A Prior to installation, valves shall be inspected for cleanliness of bore, seating surfaces etc. and for handling
damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of bolting. Valves shall be in close position before installation.

B Valves shall be operated through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which they are to
be installed to ensure proper functioning.

C Valves shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner specified for laying and jointing pipe and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each valve shall be provided with a

D Concrete pad as shown on the Drawings so that the pipe does not support the weight of the valve. Valves
shall not be used to spring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 60


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm footing to prevent settling and excessive strain on connection
to pipe.

F All stressed bolts (bonnet, seal plate and end connections) shall be inspected for adequate tightness after
installation and prior to field testing.

G Valves shall be protected against action of external agents by a coat of approved bituminous compound,
applied cold by hand brushing after pressure tests on pipelines have been completed. Buried bolts etc., shall
be protected against corrosion, with approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.

39.2.1 For each installation, the wall thimble, operating mechanism, stem and stem guides shall be installed in
Accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tolerances between seating faces shall be maintained
And any warping avoided.

39.2.2 Tapped holes in thimbles shall be protected during concreting and setting. Surfaces of thimbles and gates shall
Be protected from concrete spillage, paint, oil and debris. Thimbles shall be supported to prevent shifting
During pouring and braced horizontally and vertically to prevent distortion.

39.2.3 Nuts shall be tightened in sequence after setting and the entire assembly shall be cleaned, adjusted and
Lubricated after installation.

39.2.4 Sluice gates / Penstocks shall be operated through one complete cycle on installation to ensure proper
Functioning.

39.2.5 Sluice gates / Penstocks shall be protected against action of external agents with one coat of approved
Bituminous compound applied cold by brush after installation. Buried bolts, etc. shall be protected against
Corrosion, with approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.

39.3 Field Protection

39.3.1 Valves:
The Contractor shall protect valves against action of external agents by a coat of approved bituminous compound applied
cold by brush after pressure tests on pipelines have been completed.

39.3.2 Hydrants:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 61


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The Contractor shall apply one coat of paint, of colour specified by the Engineer, after backfilling and surface restoration is
completed.

39.3.3 Gates:
The Contractor shall protect against action of external agents with one coat of approved bituminous compound applied
cold by brush after installation.

39.3.4 Bolts:
The Contractor shall protect buried bolts against corrosion with approved paint or by polyethylene wrapping.

40 BEDDING, SURROUND, HAUNCHING, ENCASEMENT AND THRUST BLOCKS

40.1 -GENERAL

40.1.1 Scope

A.1 Pipe bedding, surround and ways of securing pipe installations are specified in this Section.

40.2 -MATERIALS

A. Pipe bedding and/or surround, and filling materials under and around pipes shall comply with the appropriate
requirements of Section 2.04.

B. All concrete work shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5.
C. Concrete bedding shall be Class 110/25.

D. Concrete for encasements, thrust blocks, arches and haunches shall be Class 250/20.

E. Compressible board shall be 20 mm thick fibrous material or similar approved material.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 62


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

40.2 - WORKMANSHIP

40.2.1 Placing Concrete

A After placing pipe the Contractor shall pour concrete in trench and thoroughly work under pipe to provide solid and
uniform bedding.

B After pipe joint is completed the Contractor shall place the balance of concrete or haunching and work into place
on both sides simultaneously.

C The Contractor shall form vertical construction joints in concrete beds, surrounds etc. at the face of pipe joints with
compressible board and finish to profile of the concrete and pipe. The Contractor shall fill any gap between spigot
and socket with approved resilient material.

41 Placing Material Other than Concrete

A The Contractor shall place surround or bedding material in bottom of prepared trench and carefully hand tamp to
minimum thicknesses.

B After pipe has been laid the Contractor shall place additional material or hunching in successive layers not
exceeding 150 mm thick on both sides simultaneously and completely fill spaces between pipe and side of trench
and carefully hand tamp without disturbing the pipe.

42 Thrust Blocks

A Thrust blocks shall be constructed to prevent thrust at all bends, T connections, crossings, pipe ends,
and tapers and fire-hydraulic as per Engineers direction and design drawings. Thrust blocks shall be
constructed between the solid ground and the accessories that need to be anchored as per the details
of the design drawings or Engineer’s direction. Polyethylene sheets of 3mm thickness shall be put
between concrete and accessories to prevent cohesion.

B Contractor shall submit shop drawings for thrust block constructed. No pressure shall be applied to
thrust blocks for 3 days after construction.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 63


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

43. CHAMBERS AND INLETS

43.1 -GENERAL

43.1.1 Scope

A This section specifies works related to valves chambers, for air valves, washout valves and butterfly valves of
diameter 300 mm and above.

43.1.2 -MATERIALS

A. Excavation and backfilling generally shall comply with Section 2 and section 3 of the Specification.

B. Concrete work generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5 of the Specification.

C. Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 5.03 "Steel Reinforcement and Fixing".

D. Precast units to BS 5911 [13] Part 200 or ASTM C478. Except for thickness which shall be as indicated on the
Drawings. Concrete shall be Class 250/20. Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].

E. Plain and reinforced concrete for cast In-Situ units shall be Class 210/25 and 250/25 respectively. Cement
shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].
F. Internal and External Coatings shall be as specified in A3, A4 and A5 of section 4.06.3. Water proofing for external
surfaces is given in Section 4.07.

G. Covers and frames shall be non-rocking, locking, solid top to specifications followed by Ministry of Transport and
comply with British Standards BS2789 or ISO 1083 or DIN 1229 or BS EN 124 [31]. Equivalent, wording on cover
shall indicate nature of network (water supply), Grades shall be as follows:

I. In Roadways: Heavy duty test load 40 tons

II. In Sidewalks, Carriage Drive and Cycle Tracks: Medium duty test load 25 tons

III. In Footpaths and Fields: Light duty, test load 7 tons

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 64


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

H. Covers shall be of circular pattern with a minimum diameter of 600 mm or rectangular with an opening 1200mm x
600mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Frames shall be provided with opening for fixing bolts which
ensure solid frame embedment into manhole concrete neck. Covers for air release valve chambers should be
provided with holes for ventilation. Covers and frames shall be coated with two layers coal tar epoxy (70% epoxy,
30% coal tar) to BS 3416 [4]. Minimum thickness 250 microns.
I. Iron steps shall be mild steel to BS 4211 [51], galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52] with 200 grams of zinc per
square meter and covered with two layers of polyethylene (PE) or polypropylene.
J. Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular purpose and use and to approval. When used to fix
galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and fixing bolts and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and
electroplated with zinc to BS EN 12329 [53].
K. Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength castings and shall conform to AASHTO M103 (ASTM A27).
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, castings shall be grade 65-35 fully
annealed. Steel castings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Test bars shall be prepared
and tested as specified in AASHTO M103.
L. Wrought iron plates and shapes shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Rolled wrought iron
bars and shapes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A207. Wrought iron plates shall conform to ASTM
A42 .
M. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all specified test coupons and Manufacturers' Certificates of
Guarantee for all structural steel, cast iron, cast steel and wrought iron parts stating that the materials supplied
meet the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM specification. The submission of such test certificates shall not relieve
the Contractor of his obligations to carry out independent tests at an approved laboratory, as directed by the
Engineer, at his own expense.

44. CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

44.1 Generally

A Prior to Installation, the Contractor shall inspect for cleanliness of bores, seating surfaces etc. and for handling
damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of pressure-containing bolting.

B The Contractor shall ensure gates and hydrants are in closed position before installation.

C Operate hydrants through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which they are to be installed
to ensure proper functioning.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 65


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

45 Installation of Valves

A Prior to installation, valves shall be inspected for cleanliness of bore, seating surfaces etc. and for handling
damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of bolting. Valves shall be in close position before installation.

B Valves shall be operated through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which they are to
be installed to ensure proper functioning.

C Valves shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner specified for laying and jointing pipe and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each valve shall be provided with a concrete pad as
shown on the Drawings so that the pipe does not support the weight of the valve. Valves shall not be used to
spring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation.

D Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm footing to prevent settling and excessive strain on connection
to pipe.

E All stressed bolts (bonnet, seal plate and end connections) shall be inspected for adequate tightness after
installation and prior to field testing.

F Valves shall be protected against action of external agents by a coat of approved bituminous compound,
applied cold by hand brushing after pressure tests on pipelines have been completed. Buried bolts etc., shall
be protected against corrosion, with approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.

45.1 For each installation, the wall thimble, operating mechanism, stem and stem guides shall be installed in
Accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tolerances between seating faces shall be maintained
And any warping avoided.

45.2 Tapped holes in thimbles shall be protected during concreting and setting. Surfaces of thimbles and gates shall
Be protected from concrete spillage, paint, oil and debris. Thimbles shall be supported to prevent shifting during
Pouring and braced horizontally and vertically to prevent distortion.

45.3 Nuts shall be tightened in sequence after setting and the entire assembly shall be cleaned, adjusted and
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 66
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Lubricated after installation.

45.4 Sluice gates / Penstocks shall be operated through one complete cycle on installation to ensure proper
Functioning.

45.5 Sluice gates / Penstocks shall be protected against action of external agents with one coat of approved
Bituminous compound applied cold by brush after installation. Buried bolts, etc. shall be protected against
Corrosion, with approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.

46 Field Protection

A Valves: The Contractor shall protect valves against action of external agents by a coat of approved bituminous
compound applied cold by brush after pressure tests on pipelines have been completed.

B Hydrants: The Contractor shall apply one coat of paint, of colour specified by the Engineer, after backfilling and
surface restoration is completed.

C Gates: The Contractor shall protect against action of external agents with one coat of approved bituminous
compound applied cold by brush after installation.

D Bolts: The Contractor shall protect buried bolts against corrosion with approved paint or by polyethylene wrapping.

47. BEDDING, SURROUND, HAUNCHING, ENCASEMENT AND THRUST BLOCKS

47.1 -GENERAL

47.1 .1 Scope

A Pipe bedding, surround and ways of securing pipe installations are specified in this Section.

47.2 -MATERIALS

A Pipe bedding and/or surround, and filling materials under and around pipes shall comply with the appropriate
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 67
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

requirements of Section 2.04.

B All concrete work shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5.

C Concrete bedding shall be Class 110/25.

D Concrete for encasements, thrust blocks, arches and haunches shall be Class 250/20.

E Compressible board shall be 20 mm thick fibrous material or similar approved material.

47.3 WORKMANSHIP

48. Placing Concrete

A After placing pipe the Contractor shall pour concrete in trench and thoroughly work under pipe to provide solid and
uniform bedding.

B After pipe joint is completed the Contractor shall place the balance of concrete or haunching and work into place
on both sides simultaneously.

C The Contractor shall form vertical construction joints in concrete beds, surrounds etc. at the face of pipe joints with
compressible board and finish to profile of the concrete and pipe. The Contractor shall fill any gap between spigot
and socket with approved resilient material.

49. Placing Material Other than Concrete

A The Contractor shall place surround or bedding material in bottom of prepared trench and carefully hand tamp to
minimum thicknesses.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 68


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B After pipe has been laid the Contractor shall place additional material or haunching in successive layers not
exceeding 150 mm thick on both sides simultaneously and completely fill spaces between pipe and side of trench
and carefully hand tamp without disturbing the pipe.

50. Thrust Blocks

A Thrust blocks shall be constructed to prevent thrust at all bends, T connections, crossings, pipe ends, tapers and
fire-hydraulic as per Engineers direction and design drawings. Thrust blocks shall be constructed between the
solid ground and the accessories that need to be anchored as per the details of the design drawings or Engineer’s
direction. Polyethylene sheets of 3mm thickness shall be put between concrete and accessories to prevent
cohesion. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for thrust block constructed. No pressure shall be applied to
thrust blocks for 3 days after construction.

51. CHAMBERS AND INLETS

51.1 -GENERAL

51.1.1 Scope

A This section specifies works related to valves chambers, for air valves, washout valves and butterfly valves of
diameter 300 mm and above.

51.1.2 -MATERIALS

A Excavation and backfilling generally shall comply with Section 2 and section 3 of the Specification.

B Concrete work generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5 of the Specification.

C Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 5.03 "Steel Reinforcement and Fixing".

D Precast units to BS 5911 [13] Part 200 or ASTM C478. Except for thickness which shall be as indicated on the
Drawings. Concrete shall be Class 250/20. Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 69


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E Plain and reinforced concrete for cast In-Situ units shall be Class 210/25 and 250/25 respectively. Cement
shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].
F Internal and External Coatings shall be as specified in A3, A4 and A5 of section 4.06.3. Water proofing for external
surfaces is given in Section 4.07.

G Covers and frames shall be non-rocking, locking, solid top to specifications followed by Ministry of Transport and
comply with British Standards BS2789 or ISO 1083 or DIN 1229 or BS EN 124 [31]. Equivalent, wording on cover
shall indicate nature of network (water supply), Grades shall be as follows:

In Roadways: Heavy duty test load 40 tons

In Sidewalks, Carriage Drive and Cycle Tracks: Medium duty test load 25 tons

In Footpaths and Fields: Light duty, test load 7 tons

H Covers shall be of circular pattern with a minimum diameter of 600 mm or rectangular with an opening 1200mm x
600mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Frames shall be provided with opening for fixing bolts which
ensure solid frame embedment into manhole concrete neck. Covers for air release valve chambers should be
provided with holes for ventilation. Covers and frames shall be coated with two layers coal tar epoxy (70% epoxy,
30% coal tar) to BS

I. 3416 [4]. Minimum thickness 250 microns.

I Iron steps shall be mild steel to BS 4211 [51], galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52] with 200 grams of zinc per
square meter and covered with two layers of polyethylene (PE) or polypropylene.
J Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular purpose and use and to approval. When used to fix
galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and fixing bolts and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and
electroplated with zinc to BS EN 12329 [53].

K Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength castings and shall conform to AASHTO M103 (ASTM A27).
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, castings shall be grade 65-35 fully
annealed. Steel castings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Test bars shall be prepared
and tested as specified in AASHTO M103.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 70
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

L Wrought iron plates and shapes shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Rolled wrought iron
bars and shapes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A207. Wrought iron plates shall conform to ASTM
A42 .

M The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all specified test coupons and Manufacturers' Certificates of
Guarantee for all structural steel, cast iron, cast steel and wrought iron parts stating that the materials supplied
meet the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM specification. The submission of such test certificates shall not relieve
the Contractor of his obligations to carry out independent tests at an approved laboratory, as directed by the
Engineer, at his own expense.

51.1.3 - CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

51.1.3.1 Valve Chambers

A Construction shall be in situ concrete, precast concrete as indicated on the Drawings.

B Concrete works shall comply to concrete specifications as per concrete and reinforcement specification in section
6.

C Bituminous slurry External concrete surfaces for valve chambers shall be coated with bituminous slurry. External
coating shall consists of two coats applied by brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum
thickness shall be 400 microns.

D Internal surface for valve chambers shall be coated with two coats of epoxy.

E A.5 The Contractor shall submit details of insulation material and thickness of coatings and type of coating as per
the manufacturer.

F The covers frame shall be set solidly in mortar and fix firmly using fixing bolts. The Contractor shall position the
cover centrally over the opening and level and square with surrounding finishes and set cover in position to
prevent twisting.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 71


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

51.1.4 RECORDS

A The Contractor shall maintain accurate records details for whole project components and show details for the
following works. These records should be submitted in both hardcopy and digital forms, three

B copies for each form. Digital data and drawings should be prepared in compliance with geographic information
system (GIS) and digital mapping in the directorate (if any):

51.1.4.1 As-Built House Connection Plan

A This record showing the sketch of the particular section indicating the mainline and the house connection. Listed
below is the information required for this record;

I. Mainline number

II. Mainline section number

III. Length of mainline pipe

IV. Mainline pipe diameter and type of pipe

V. Insert level of the mainline at the connection location

VI. Connection number & position

VII. Type of connection

VIII. House connection pipe diameter

IX. Distance from centerline of mainline to the building

X. Invert of end lateral at the building

XI. A column of remarks must be provided for future up-dating of house connections

51.1.4.2 . Mainline Records

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 72


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A There are three (3) important records to be maintained from constructed mainlines, these are the general layout
and bench mark, site plan and the line profiles. Description of these records are as follows;

51.1. 4.3 For General Layout & Bench Mark

A This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film covering the whole area of work executed by the
contractor with an “appropriate” scale that will accommodate on drawing sheet. Required information is as follows:

I. Line numbers
II. Valve chambers and fire hydrants numbers
III. Name of street
IV. Name of important landmark in the area (i.e mosque, school, garden, hospital, clinic, shopping mall,
government offices, etc…)
V. Location of bench marks with their designated numbers and elevations
VI. A separate table is to be allocated describing the complete bench marks used in the project.

51.1. 4.4 For Site Plans

A This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000 showing in segments for the entire
area of work executed by the Contractor. Required information's as follows;
I. Line numbers

II. Numbers of valve chambers, fire hydrants and other network accessories

III. Coordinates for each and every intersection, valve chamber and fire hydrant

IV. Lateral distance location for each and every chamber(i.e. distance from center of chamber to

property wall or sidewalk curb stone or street light post or fire hydrant traffic light post or any

favorable base of measurement)

V. Name of street

VI. Name of important landmark in the area (i.e. mosque, school, garden, hospital, clinic, shopping

mall, government offices, etc…)


SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 73
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

51.1.4.5 For Line Profiles

A This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000 horizontal and 1:100 vertical for the
entire mainlines constructed in the whole area of work by the Contractor. Required information is as follows:

I. Line number

II. Surface condition

III. Ground level

IV. Invert level

V. Depth-to-invert

VI. Distance

VII. Chainage

VIII. Pipe data (pipe diameter & type of pipe, slope and bedding)

IX. Rock levels

X. Underground utilities crossing either below or over the mainline pipes

XI. Type of utility

XII. Description

XIII. Top elevation

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 74


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

INSTRUMENTATION FOR SMART


WATER & IRRIGATION NETWORKS

52. PROCESS INSTRUMENTS

52.1 Electricity Supply

A. The electricity supply for all instrument systems shall be at 220 volts, single phase, 50Hz or 24Vdc.

52.2 Sun Protection

A. All field mounted items, transducers etc. shall be provided with a suitable sun shield to ensure that the
device is shaded from direct exposure to the sun at all times. The sunshield and supporting brackets
shall be in stainless steel.

B. Where instrument connection cables are mounted above ground they shall be installed in conduit or
mounted on cable tray which shall be fitted with a cover after all the cables on the cable tray have been
installed.

52.3 Instrument Supports

A. All brackets, supports and fixings required for the correct installation of the instrument shall be in
stainless steel.

52.4 Instrument Signals

A. Analogue signals should be 4-20mA, fully configurable and HART protocol.

B. Digital signals shall be volt free contacts suitable for switching 230V AC or DC.

C. All instrument transmitter controllers shall have suitable communication ports for the local connection of
auxiliary devices.

52.5 Instrumentation general requirements

A. Those requirements are for guidance, the tendered is requested to propose any higher specifications if
according to his design more sophistication are required to achieve the required performance.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 75


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

52.5.1 Electromagnetic Flow Meter

A. The flow meters shall consist of a flanged sensor and transmitter which may be mounted integrally or
remotely with interconnecting cables up to 650 feet in length.

I. The flow metering system shall be microprocessor-based and possess a method in which to

store non-volatile memory, the sensor calibration and transmitter setup information. The

electronics shall be interchangeable for meters sizes 1”-78””.

II. The sensor shall be the proper size to measure the design flow rate of the piping and be noted

in the instrument schedule, and measure bi-directional flow as a standard.

III. The sensor shall consist of a stainless steel flow tube with carbon steel (1”-78”)

IV. The flow meter shall have an accuracy of ± 0.2% of reading and sensitivity of 0.001 m/s.

V. Velocity shall be 0.5 m/s to greater than 5m/s.

VI. The sensor liner and electrode material shall be chosen to be compatible with the process fluid.

All fluids require a minimum conductivity of 5µS/cm (20µS/cm for deionized water).

VII. The sensor tube shall be lined and approved in accordance with NSF 61 with Polyurethane

based upon the size of the flow meter and the process media conditions.

VIII. The sensor shall house two measuring electrodes, a grounding electrode, and one for physical

empty pipe detection. The electrodes shall be bullet-nosed shaped and made of 316L SS with

Hastelloy C material available as an option.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 76


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

IX. The external sensor housing shall enclose the coil assemblies and internal wiring. The

materials shall be designed and constructed to prevent moisture ingress and promote corrosion

resistance.

X. Unless noted otherwise in the instrument schedule, the sensor flanges shall be ANSI B16.1

Class 150 for 24” and smaller, and AWWA Class D for 28” and larger.

XI. The electrode circuit shall have a minimum impedance of 1012 ohms to overcome moderate

coating buildup.

XII. The sensor shall be rated for NEMA 4X service .Sensor rating shall be NEMA6 P/IP68 service

for applications of submergence 10Ft of head pressure. If NEMA 6P/IP68 is specified in the

instrument schedule, the transmitter shall be remotely mounted and custom length cables shall

be attached at the factory. The meter must have a direct burial option as well.

XIII. The sensor must be capable of measuring electrical conductivity range from 5 to 10,000

microsiemens/cm.

XIV. Flowmeter installation on pipes shall be as per manufacturer recommendations

B. The transmitter shall be a three-stage microprocessor controller mounted integrally or remotely as


specified. The power supply to the transmitter shall be 100-240 VAC/18-30 VDC Universal power
supply. The transmitter housing will carry a NEMA 4X rating and shall be constructed to prevent
moisture ingress, promote corrosion resistance, and be impervious to saline environments.

I. The transmitter shall allow local programming that can be operated through the enclosure window without opening
the electrical enclosure.
II. The transmitter display shall indicate simultaneous flow rate and total flow with 3 Totalizers (forward, reverse and
net total) and user-selectable engineering units, readout of diagnostic error messages, and support 12 standard
languages.
III. The transmitter shall safeguard against entering of invalid data for the particular meter size and all programming
parameters shall be access-code protected.
IV. The standard transmitter output shall be:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 77


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

V. 4-20mA Hart, 0-20mA, pulse, frequency or switch.


VI. If indicated in drawings ,the magnetic flowmeter transmitter must have a standard, unmodified form of Ethernet
communications like Ethernet/IP, Proifnet IO, Profibus DP or Modbus TCP available
VII. These communication options, if required, must be integral to the magnetic flowmeter transmitter electronics; and
using an external third party device is unacceptable. With Ethernet/IP, the magnetic flowmeter must be provided
with an auto-constructed integration document and once connected the controller automatically reads the
flowmeter and auto populates the registers. A complete integration tool including tested documentation,
faceplates, level 3 add-on profiles (AOP), instructions and pre-engineered code must be available. A mag-meter
ordered with standard outputs may be upgraded in the field by adding a communication card without returning the
unit to the factory.
VIII. The transmitter shall support commissioning options via a service interface or DD less operation via an internal
web server accessible through a transmitter accessible RJ-45 port.
IX. An integrated AUTO-ZERO function shall compensate for any external interference and eliminate zero-drift. An
AUTOGAIN function shall enable a 1000:1 turndown measuring range by amplifying the measuring signal and
increasing measurement resolution at various flow rates. To further ensure the specified accuracy, the transmitter
electronics shall automatically perform internal temperature drift compensation.
X. Upon any power failure, the transmitter shall retain all setup parameters and accumulated measurements
internally in non-volatile memory. All units shall be protected against voltage spikes from the power source with
internal transient protection. Power consumption shall be no more than 16 VA, independent of meter size.
XI. The transmitter shall include infinitely adjustable low flow cutoff.
XII. As standard, the electronics must have a “Heartbeat Diagnostics” function that monitors continuous information
about the state or health of the magnetic flowmeter. thus not requiring any additional parts kit by the end-user.
Secondary (separate) handheld verification devices or pulse generators are not required to perform flowmeter
verification. The verification must be accessed via a standard Web server or asset management software.

C. Accessories

I. Stainless steel tag - labeled to match the contract documents.


II. Provide grounding rings, as per manufacture’s recommendations, if required
III. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations
D. Source Quality Control

I. Magnetic flow meters shall be factory calibrated on an approved test stand with certified
accuracy traceable to NIST, compliant with the ISO 17025 laboratory standard accredited by a
national verification agency such as A2LA.
II. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data points shall indicate
apparent and actual flows. The flow calibration data shall be confirmed by the manufacturer and
shipped with the meters to the project site.
III. The manufacturer shall provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all
calibration instruments.
IV. The manufacturer shall provide ISA data sheet ISA-TR20.00.01 as latest revision of form
20F2321. The manufacturer shall complete the form with all known data and model codes and

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 78


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

dash out the inapplicable fields. Incomplete data sheets submitted will result in a rejected
submittal.
V. The manufacturer shall provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all
calibration instruments.
VI. The flow metering system shall include verification at the time of manufacturing. Results of the
verification shall be unaffected by changing process parameters and environmental conditions.
The verification shall permit long-term analysis and statement of the sensor and transmitter
linearity, repeatability and sensor stability in the field. The result of the individual verification
procedure shall lead to a clear pass or failed result.
VII. The technique of sensor and transmitter verification shall be by a method of which has been
vetted by a third party – used by the manufacturer of flow measurement devices. This may
include NIST, FMEDA, TÜV or others approved by the engineer.

52.5.2 Clamp-On Ultrasonic Flowmeter

A. Ultrasonic clamp-on flow meters shall be used for measuring domestic raw and chlorinated potable
drinking water. The meters shall utilize the ultrasonic transit time principle, whereby ultrasonic pulses are
contra-propagated from externally mounted sensors, and the respective transit times in the upstream and
downstream directions through the liquid medium are measured and compared.

B. The difference in measured transit times shall be linearly proportional to flow velocity from 1.0 to 50 feet
per second. accuracy of the pulse output shall be ± 0.2% of rate at the flow rates generated.

C. Flow meters installation shall be as per manufacture recommendations. The Manufacturer shall supply
any equipment necessary to set up the meter in working order.

D. The flow meters shall consist of a clamp-on sensor pair, sensor holders, mounting straps, installation aids
and a transmitter which mounts remotely with interconnecting cables up to 200 ft in length.

I. The flow metering system shall be microprocessor based and possess a method to store in non-
volatile memory the sensor calibration and transmitter setup information. The electronics shall
be interchangeable for meters from 2” to 157”.
II. The clamp-on sensors shall be of the proper nominal operating frequency to measure the
design flow rate of the piping and shall be noted in the instrument schedule.
III. The sensor shall be rated for NEMA 4X service .Sensor shall be submersible NEMA6P rated. If
specified in the drawings, the transmitter shall be remotely mounted and specified length cables
shall be attached at the factory.
IV. The clamp-on sensors shall be manufactured from materials suitable for continuous
submersion.
V. Actual Sensor positioning on the pipe shall be prescribed by the transmitter via display and
communications protocol (where employed) and the Sensor location shall be mechanically
guided to eliminate dimensional error and to preclude reliance upon other manual means of
positioning.
VI. Each sensor shall locate mechanically and lock within its sensor holder so as to preclude
incorrect sensor orientation during installation or accidental dislocation due to vibration during
operational service.
VII. When sensors are located within their holders ,an integral spring shall be compressed and serve
to maintain correct contact pressure with pipe surface during operational service.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 79


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E. The transmitter shall be a three stage microprocessor controller mounted remotely . The power supply
to the transmitter shall be 85 - 260 VAC, 20 – 55 VAC or 11 – 40 VDC. Transmitter housing shall be
powder coated cast aluminum with NEMA 4X rating. The transmitter shall include:

I. Guided user programming via simple push-button operation or where preferred, optical touch-
control that can be operated through the enclosure window, without opening the electrical
enclosure.
II. The standard transmitter output shall be:4-20mA Hart, 0-20mA, pulse, frequency or switch.
III. The transmitter shall have as a minimum a 2-line x 16 character backlit LCD display or 4-line x
16 character backlit LCD display, used for programming as well as for simultaneous display of
flow rate and total flow in user-selectable engineering units, and readout of diagnostic error
messages, selectable from either 5 or 12 standard languages.
IV. The transmitter shall safeguard against entering of invalid data for the particular meter size and
all programming parameters shall be access-code protected.
V. The Transmitter shall operate a time measurement system shared across the upstream and
downstream ultrasound transmissions to obviate the need for a zero flow condition during flow
meter commissioning, and to eliminate zero-drift during operation. An AUTOGAIN function shall
ensure adequate signal strength for reliable measurement during liquid condition variations.
VI. Following completed installation of clamp-on sensors, holders, strapping band, cables and
transmitter, the flow measuring system shall during its initialization or startup phase,
automatically adjust its nominal operating frequency within an available frequency band, so as
to optimize the actual operational frequency in respect of pipe material, wall thickness, liner (if
present) and fluid condition.
VII. Upon any power failure, the unit shall retain all setup parameters and accumulated
measurements internally in non-volatile memory. All units shall be protected against voltage
spikes from the power source with internal transient protection. Power consumption shall be no
more than 12 VA, independent of meter size.
VIII. The transmitter electronics shall include adjustable low flow cutoff.
F. Accessories

I. Stainless steel tag - labeled to match the Contract Documents.


II. Provide necessary guidance for installation on catholically protected piping.
III. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations.
G. Source Quality Control

I. Ultrasonic transit time clamp-on flow meters may be factory verified on an approved test stand
with; certified accuracy traceable to NIST, compliant with the ISO 17025 standard, and third
party accreditation by a national verification agency such as A2LA.
II. A real-time computer generated printout of the Measurement Report to indicate apparent and
actual flows. The flow calibration data points would be confirmed by the manufacturer and will
be confirmed with shipment of the meters to the project site.
III. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments.
IV. Provide ISA data sheet ISA-TR20.00.01. Use the latest revision of form 20F2321. Complete the
form with all known data and model codes, and dash out the inapplicable fields. Incomplete data
sheets submitted will be result in a rejected submittal.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 80


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

V. The flow metering system will permit an optional verification at the time of manufacturing. The
verification will permit long term analysis of the transmitter linearity, repeatability and sensor
stability.
VI. The technique of sensor and transmitter verification must be by a method which has been
vetted by a third party used by the manufacturer of flow measurement devices. This may
include NIST, FMEDA, TÜV or others approved by the engineer.

52.5.3 Ultrasonic Open Channel Flowmeter

A. The system shall be of the ultrasonic type for continuous level and/or open channel flow measurement.
System shall consist of transmitter, transducer and interconnecting cable. The system accuracy shall be
0.25% of measurement span or as dictated by the supplier.

B. The transmitter shall be microprocessor based with an integral operator interface housed within a NEMA
4X corrosion resistant enclosure with a separate wiring connection compartment. There shall be no
jumpers, trimpots, dip switches or external devices required to fully commission the transmitter. The
operator interface shall have a back lit 4 1/2 digit number display, vertical and horizontal matrix display,
bar graph display, and a six button keypad supporting a matrix (spreadsheet) style interface. All error
codes, process variables and internal values shall be accessible and displayable on the integral operator
interface. The transmitter shall contain a fuzzy logic implementation manager to allow untrained
operators to commission the system without assistance. Transmitter shall support Floating Average
Curve (FAC) , fixed target suppression, zone evaluation and agitator filtering algorithms.

C. The transmitter shall support transducers covering a span of one inch to 150 feet without modification or
hardware adjustment. One or two fully isolated 0/4-20 outputs @ 600 ohms maximum shall be supplied.
Output shall be proportional to level, flow or volume. Five fully programmable 4 amp SPDT relay outputs
shall be provided as well as companion LED status indicators on the operator interface. An integral
mechanical six digit non resetable counter and remote totalizer counter driver shall be provided. Pump
sequencing, differential level, open channel flow, solids level, liquid level applications shall be supported.

D. Remote HART or RS 485 Distributed Measurement System DMS digital communication shall be
supported.

E. The transmitter shall support the input of a separate overfill/under fill l level switch for enhanced fill
control.

F. The transducer(s) shall be powered by the transmitter with less than 50 V up to 1000 feet away via
standard twisted shielded two conductor cabling. EMI/RFI effects on the combined system shall be less
than 1% at 10volts/meter (NAMUR, IEC 801-3 standards) allowing installation in standard aluminum
conduit. The transducer(s) shall have polypropylene housings and be rated Class 1 Division 1 or Class
ll Division 1 by Factory Mutual (FM). A 1 inch NPT connection shall be provided to mount the
transducer.

G. The transducer shall be provided with a 15 foot interconnecting cable and can be extended from the
transmitter up to 1000 feet away via splicing standard twisted shielded two conductor cabling.
Transducers shall have integral temperature sensors to support speed of sound compensation and be
weather proof and fully submersible.

H. The transmitter and transducer shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 certified facility.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 81


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

52.5.4 Electric Actuator

A. All Motorized valves shall be supplied complete with their electric actuators by same supplier. Contraction
is responsible for providing Calculations for combination between valve and actuator within the material
submittal.

B. Refer to Mechanical section for valve construction specifications and comply with the below Electric
actuator specifications.

C. General

I. The electric actuator shall be suitable for use on nominal voltage of 380 volts 3-phase 50 Hz power supply and
incorporated with motor drive, integral reversing starter, local control and indication facilities, terminal remote
control and indication and cable terminals suitably housed in separate designated compartment within self
contained and sealed enclosure. The actuator shall include a device to ensure that the motor runs with the correct
rotation for the required direction of valve travel irrespective of the connection sequence of the power supply.
II. In order to maintain the integrity of the enclosure, setting of the torque levels, position limits and configuration of
the indication contacts etc shall be carried out without the removal of any actuator covers. Commissioning tools
shall be provided with the actuators and must meet the enclosure protection and certification levels of the
actuators.
III. Commissioning tools shall not form an integral part of the actuator and must be removable for secure
storage/authorised release. In addition, provision shall be made for the protection of configured actuator settings
by a means independent of access to the commissioning tool.
IV. Small sizes motorized BF valves or gate valves (less than 300 mm) ,supplied electric actuator shall be sized with
its valve shall operate in their appropriate network pressure with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action and tight close off against maximum pressure in the network Complete
with the following features:
V. Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the maximum out of balance
pressure across them.
VI. Shall have position indicators unless fitted to terminal units.
i. Auxiliary Switches Shall have changeover contacts suitable for 220V-a.c. 2 amp rating. For
Modulating Motors, Auxiliary Switch packs containing at least two electrically independent
switches one for each end of the motor travel, adjustable for operation over at least half the
motor travel. For Two-positions Motor one electrically independent switch.
ii. Feedback Potentiometer whose resistance varies proportionally with the actuator travel.
D. Actuator Sizing

1. The actuator shall be sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential pressure in the
system. The safety margin of motor power available for seating and unseating the valve shall be
sufficient to ensure torque switch trip at maximum valve torque with the supply voltage 10% below
nominal. The operating speed shall be such as to give valve closing and opening as specified.
E. Environmental

1. Actuator shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor application. The actuator shall be capable of
functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from 22°F (-30°C) to 158°F (70°C). Actuators for
explosion-hazardous applications shall in addition be certified Flameproof for Zones 1 and 2
(Divisions 1 and 2 Group gases).
F. Enclosure

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 82


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

I. Actuator shall be O-ring sealed, watertight protection conforming to IP68 and shall at the same
time have an inner watertight protection and dustproof O-ring seal between the terminal
compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator. The motor and all other
internal electrical elements of the actuator shall be protected from ingress of moisture and dust
when the terminal cover is removed for site for cabling.
II. Enclosure shall allow for temporary site storage without the need for electrical supply
connection. All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel, however, the use of unprotected
stainless steel fasteners (including grease lubricated) in aluminium alloy casings is not
permitted.
G. Motor

I. Motors must be suitable for operating at 3 phase power supply voltage of 380 Volt AC (+/- 10
%), 50 Hz (+/- 2 %) and shall be specifically designed for valve-actuator operation,
characterized by high starting torque, low stall torque and low inertia. Motors shall be totally
enclosed non ventilated type (TENV). Motor housings and covers to be made of sea water
resistant aluminum. Motor-insulation must be in accordance with IEC 85 Class F (155° C).
Motors must be protected by 3 thermal monitoring device, which are embedded in motor
windings. Motor connections shall be internal by means of plug and socket.
II. Motors must be totally separated from lubricant-filled gearing of actuator, allowing replacement
of motor without loss of lubricant regardless of mounting position. Motors shall have a dog
coupling as mechanical connection to actuators worm shaft.
III. Actuator motors must develop full torque when power is turned on. All motors shall be of high
starting torque type to facilitate 'unseating' of the valve. Each motor shall have a rating plate
marked in accordance with IEC 34.1 as far as applicable.
H. Motor Protection

1. Protection shall be provided for the motor as follows:-


a. The motor shall be de-energized in the event of a stall when attempting to unseat a jammed
valve;
b. Motor temperature shall be sensed by a thermostat de energizing the motor in case of
overheating;
c. Lost phase protection.
I. Fail Safe

1. Auxiliary spring or power pack for fail-safe conditions.


2. The spring shall be rated for a minimum of 1000 operations.
3. The power packs shall have their batteries trickle charged and each full charge shall be capable of
operating the actuator ten times. The battery shall require no maintenance and shall have a life of
at least 5 years.
4. Both fail-safe devices shall have sufficient torque to open or close valves and dampers against the
maximum out of balance pressure across them.
J. Gearing

1. The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil-filled gearcase suitable for operation at any
angle. All drive gearing and components must be of metal construction and incorporate a lost-motion
hammer blow feature. For rising spindle valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising
stem, and incorporate thrust bearings of the ball or roller type at the base of the actuator. The design
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 83
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

should be such as to permit the opening of the gearcase for inspection or disassembled without
releasing the stem thrust or taking the valve out of service.
K. Anti-Condensation Heater

1. In order to prevent condensation, a heater must be installed inside the actuator, suitable for
continuous operation. Actuator must provide an alarm signal in case of failure of anti condensation
heater.
L. Hand Operation

1. A handwheel shall be provided for emergency operation, engaged when the motor is declutched by
a lever or similar means, the drive being restored to power automatically by starting the motor. The
handwheel or selection lever shall not move on restoration of motor drive.
2. Provision shall be made for the hand/auto selection lever to be locked in both hand and auto
positions.
3. It should be possible to select hand operation while the actuator is running or start the actuator motor
while the hand/auto selection lever is locked in hand without damage to the drive train.
4. The handwheel drive must be mechanically independent of the motor drive and any handwheel
gearing should be such as to permit emergency manual operation in a reasonable time. Clockwise
operation of the handwheel shall give closing movement of the valve unless otherwise stated in the
job specification. The material for handwheel shall be from marine alloy (BS 1490, LM5M).
M. Emergency Power Supply

1. All actuators, which have permanent power supply facilities and are required to comply to fail safe
operation requirements, shall be provided with uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for emergency
shut down when permanent power supply failed.
N. Electrical Socket for Portable Power Supply Connection

1. All remote actuators, which permanent power supply is not available, electrical socket point shall be
provided for each of the actuators. The electrical socket point shall be used for connection with
portable generator or specifically designed battery power pack for operating the actuator.
O. Drive Bushing

1. The actuator shall be furnished with a drive bushing easily detachable for machining to suit the valve
stem or gearbox input shaft. Normally the drive bush shall be positioned in a detachable base of the
actuator. Thrust bearings, when housed in a separate thrust base should be of the sealed for life
type.
P. Torque and Turns Limitation

1. Torque and turns limitation shall be adjusted as follows:


a. Position setting range : 2.5 to 100,000 turns, with resolution to 15º of actuator output;
b. Torque setting : 40% to 100% rated torque."Latching" shall be provided for the torque sensing
system to inhibit torque off during unseating or during starting in mid travel against high inertia
loads.The electrical circuit diagram of the actuator should not vary with valve type remaining
identical regardless of whether the valve is to open or close on torque or position limit.
Q. Remote Valve Position / Actuator Status Indication

1. Four contacts shall be provided which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve. Provision
shall be made for the selection of a normally closed or open contact form. Contacts shall maintain
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 84
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

and update position indication during handwheel operation when all external power to the actuator is
isolated.
2. The contacts shall be rated at 5A, 250V AC, 30V DC.
3. As an alternative to providing valve position any of the four above contacts shall be selectable to
signal one of the following:-
a. Valve opening, closing or moving;
b. Thermostat tripped, lost phase;
c. Motor tripped on torque in mid travel, motor stalled;
d. Remote selected;
e. Actuator manually operated by handwheel.
R. Local Position Indication

1. The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from fully open to fully close in 1%
increments. Red, green and yellow lights corresponding to Open, Closed and Intermediate position
shall be included on the indicator. End of travel indication colors shall be reversible.
2. The digital display shall be maintained and updated during hand wheel operation when all external
power to the actuator is isolated. The display shall incorporate valve, actuator and control status
indication. Provision shall be made to orientate the display through increments of 90°. Provision shall
be made in the design for the addition of a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA analogue signal
corresponding to valve travel for remote indication when required.
3. Provision shall be made in the design for the addition of a contactless transmitter to give a 4-20mA
analogue signal corresponding to actuator output torque for remote indication when required.
S. Actuator Display

1. The actuator shall incorporate a unique liquid crystal display developed specifically for actuator
indication application for various installation applications. The display shall allow easy, distance
viewing of valve position, torque and diagnostic screens. A diffused LED backlighting system
provides high visibility in all light conditions. The LCD display shall supplement with position
indication lights, green, yellow and red.
2. The display unit and the viewing panel shall be robust and modular in construction and replaceable.
3. The replacement of the viewing glass panel shall be easy and ingress protection shall be maintained
as original namely IP68.
T. Integral Starter and Transformer

1. The reversing starter, control transformer and local controls shall be integral with the valve actuator
suitably housed to prevent breathing and condensation. The starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per
hour and of rating appropriate to motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed from two of
the incoming three phases and incorporate overload protection. It shall have the necessary tappings
and be adequately rated to provide power for the following functions:-
a. Energization of the contactor coils;
b. 24V DC output where required for remote controls;
c. Supply for all the internal electrical circuits;
d. Integral local control and control mode selector.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 85


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

2. The actuator shall incorporate local controls for Open, Close and Stop and a Local/Stop/Remote
mode selector switch lockable in any one of the following three positions: local control only, stop (no
electrical operation), remote control plus local stop only. It shall be possible to select maintained or
non-maintained local control.
3. Provision shall be made to orientate the local controls through increments of 90°.
U. Control Wiring Facilities

1. The necessary wiring and terminals shall be provided in the actuator for the following control
functions:-
a. Open and close external interlocks to inhibit local and remote valve opening and/or closing
control;
b. Provision shall be made to configure the interlocks to be active in remote control only;
c. Remote controls fed from an internal 24V DC supply and/or from an external supply between
20V and 120V AC or 20V and 60 V DC, to be suitable for any one or more of the following
methods of control:-
i. Open, Close and Stop control;
ii. Open ,stop and Close feedback
iii. Selector switch remote/local feedback

d. It shall be possible to reverse valve travel without the necessity of stopping the actuator. The
starter contactors shall be protected from excessive current surges during travel reversal by an
automatic time delay on energization of the contactor coils.
e. The internal circuits associated with the remote control and monitoring functions are to be
designed to withstand simulated lighting impulses of up to 1.1kV.
V. Monitoring Facilities

1. Facilities shall be provided for monitoring actuator operation and availability. Monitor relay having
one changeover contact shall be provided for monitoring control mode availability. The relay can be
energized from the control transformer only when the Local/Off/Remote selector is in the Remote
position to indicate that the actuator is available for remote (control room) operation.
2. Provide monitoring of overload, phase failure and phase sequence, it shall be possible to provide
indication of Thermostat trip or hi temperature alarm .
3. The actuator shall include a diagnostic module, which will store and enable download of historical
actuator operation and torque data to permit analysis of actuator and valve in-service performance.
4. Data download shall be carried out without removing any covers and all shall be available locally to
the actuator or remotely via telecom data transfer.
5. Diagnostic and configuration software shall be made by Scada system user PC systems.
W. Wiring and Terminals

1. Internal wiring shall be tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of appropriate size for the
control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly identified at each end. The terminals shall be
embedded in a terminal block of high tracking resistance compound. The terminal compartment shall
be separated from the inner electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight sea and
shall be provided with a minimum of 3 threaded cable entries with provision for a minimum of 4.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 86


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

2. All wiring supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for physical and
environmental protection. External conduit connections between components are not acceptable.
Adurable terminal identification card showing plan of terminals shall be provided attached to the
inside of the terminal box cover indicating:-
a. Serial number;
b. External voltage values;
c. Wiring diagram number;
d. Terminal layout.
3. This must be suitable for the Manufacturer or Supplier to inscribe cable core identification alongside
terminal numbers.
X. Performance Test Certificate

1. Each actuator must be performance tested. Individual test certificates shall be supplied free of
charge.
2. The test equipment shall simulate a typical valve load, and the following parameters shall be
recorded.
a. Current at maximum torque setting;
b. Torque at max. torque setting;
c. Flash test voltage;
d. Actuator output speed or operating time. In addition, the test certificate shall record details of
specification such as gear ratios for both manual and automatic and second stage gearing if
provided, drive closing direction, wiring diagram number. Each valve and actuator must be
assembled and tested at factory confirming the selected torque and closing pressure. Test
certificate shall be supplied for each valve/actuator.

52.5.5 Water leakage detection for valve chamber:

A. Water leakage detectors shall be of the AC type that can be used with an extension cable to extend the
detector coverage. The relay shall have an appropriate degree of protection IP-68 industrial type suitable
for the environment in which it will be installed. The detector output shall be suitable to be interfaced with
the RTU controller.

52.5.6 Pressure Measurement

A. The pressure transmitter shall provide a two-wire, loop powered, 4-20 mA signal proportional to the
process differential pressure. The transmitter output shall be field selectable for pressure, level or flow
applications without the need for a hand-held device. In addition to the analog signal, the transmitter
shall also provide a simultaneous digital signal superimposed on the analog output, but shall not affect
this analog output. The digital signal shall utilize the HART protocol. The unit shall operate with 10.5 to
45 VDC in non-hazardous applications and 10.5to 30 VDC in FM approved installations.

B. If indicated in drawings, the unit shall provide a digital communications signal via Profibus PA or
Foundation Fieldbus protocol proportional to the process pressure. The unit shall operate with 9 to
32VDC.

C. For waste water: The sensor shall utilize capacitance technology in conjunction with a dry cell (no oil fill)
ceramic sensor construction for measuring range up to 600 PSIG/ A. Maximum deflection of the ceramic
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 87
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

diaphragm shall not exceed 0.001 inch full scale movement to minimize diaphragm fatigue and the
effects of build-up. The ceramic diaphragm shall be immune to damage due to full vacuum and shall
have an overpressure (overload) pressure rating of:

1. 60 PSIG/A for span of 0.075 to 1.5 PSIG(A)


2. 75 PSIG/A for span of 0.075 to 3.6 PSIG(A)
3. 90 PSIG/A for span of 0.075 to 6 PSIG(A)
4. 150 PSIG/A for span of 0.15 to 15 PSIG(A)
5. 260 PSIG/A for span of 0.3 to 30 PSIG(A)
6. 360 PSIG/A for span of 0.6 to 60 PSIG(A)
7. 600 PSIG/A for span of 1.5 to 150 PSIG(A)
8. 900 PSIG/A for URL of 6 to 600 PSIG(A)
D. For Drinking and irrigation water, the sensor shall utilize a monosilicon sensing element with a metal
process diaphragm (constructed of 316 SS, Alloy C276 or other specified materials) for measuring
ranges up to 10500PSIG/A. The polysilicon sensors shall have an overpressure (proof) pressure rating
of:

1. 60 PSIG for span of 0.075 to 1.5 PSIG(A)


2. 60 PSIG for span of 0.075 to 3.6 PSIG(A)
3. 90 PSIG for span of 0.075 to 6 PSIG(A)
4. 150 PSIG for span of 0.15 to 15 PSIG(A)
5. 300 PSIG for span of 0.3 to 30 PSIG(A)
6. 405 PSIG for span of 0.6 to 60 PSIG(A)
7. 600 PSIG for span of 1.5 to 150 PSIG(A)
8. 2320 PSIG for URL of 6 to 600 PSIG(A)
9. 6000 PSIG for URL of 15 to 1500 PSIG/A
10. 9000 PSIG for URL of 60 to 6000 PSIG/A
11. 15200 PSIG for URL of 105 to 10500 PSIG/A
E. The transmitter accuracy shall be 0.05% of calibrated span. This accuracy shall include the effects of
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability. The transmitter may be turned down from the nominal sensor
range 100:1 or higher upon request.

F. The transmitter shall include a memory/EEPROM device that allows easy commissioning of multiple
similar measuring points, event and configuration change recording, and pressure and temperature
process data recording for evaluation. The software shall allow for bi-directional flow, and for user-
selectable engineering units. The transmitter software shall provide the facility to establish a process
diagnostic window, whereby a

G. The sensor shall incorporate all of the calibration and characterization data so as to be completely
replaceable and interchangeable without the need for recalibration. The 0.05% accuracy shall be
maintained on the interchanged sensor. The electronics shall also be replaceable without the need for
recalibration on the sensor. The calibration of the transmitter shall be via external push-buttons which will
allow the transmitter to be reranged without the need for any pressure source or other external handheld
devices.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 88
WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

H. The transmitter shall include an EEPROM device that allows duplication of similar measuring points, and
provides a "first-in first-out" recording capability for pressure and temperature process data for evaluation
in case of transmitter failure to process excursions outside expected values.

I. The transmitter shall have versions which allow the ceramic sensor to be mounted flush with the process
connection. The process connection and process seal gasket wetted parts shall be interchangeable and
replaceable on-site without the need for recalibration. There shall also be options which allow no metal
contacting the process.

J. The transmitter shall have versions with high-temperature process capability WITHOUT the use of a
diaphragm seal up to 355F/180C (PMP72).

K. The transmitter shall have a digital display showing both the digital value and a 0-100 % bar graph. The
display shall be universal to all ranges and incorporate a plug-in modular design to allow field retrofit
without the need for software or electronics modification. The display shall facilitate a "quick setup" for
commissioning according to process parameters for pressure and level. The transmitter software shall
make provision for linearization of tank level measurement, density correction, and selection of
engineering units.

L. The unit shall have a dynamic response time (dead time plus rise time) of 60ms or less (120ms for
ceramic transmitters with FM XP approvals).

M. Diaphragm seal versions shall be available to expand the operating parameters of the transmitter.

N. The transmitter shall be CSA General Purpose for non-hazardous areas .The housing shall be rated
NEMA4X and shall be available in 316SS and poly-coated aluminum versions.

END OF SECTION

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 14 00 ‐ 89


WATER UTILITY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

33 30 00 SANITARY SEWAGE

33 31 00 SANITARY SEWAGE PIPING

33 31 00 .1 SCOPE

A. The works cover the supply of materials, installation, testing and commissioning of all pipes,
fittings, valves, and appurtenances related to wastewater collection works , sewer force mains &
storm water works

33 31 00 .2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 - GENERAL

A. Scope

A.1 This section outlines the sequence of construction works, aspects related to the right of way (ROW)
and the general requirements for supply and handling of equipments and materials.

2 -SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall adhere to the sequence of construction as set out below unless a justified
request for modifying this sequence is approved by the Engineer at least two weeks prior to
commencement of work on the affected section of the network:

Stake out pipe alignments.

Clear and grade the right of way.

Conduct field surveys.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 1


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Carry out exploratory trenching across existing roads to verify location, depth, size and type of
existing utilities.

Prepare and submit for approval composite Shop Drawings for all utilities showing alignment, ground
elevation, trench invert elevation, pipe size, class and length, station and size of fittings, valves, manholes
and inspection chambers, inlets, appurtenances and structures to be demolished and reinstated (curbstone,
rails, culverts, etc.). Cross sections showing location and inverts of existing pipes and those proposed shall
be prepared. Pipes, structures and other utilities to be removed or relocated shall be indicated on the Shop
Drawings. The Contract Drawings shall be modified wherever required to produce the detailed Shop
Drawings.

Relocate, demolish and reinstate existing utilities interfering with pipeline alignments.
Remove pavement layers, excavate trenches, place bedding all as required.

Lay and join pipes, fittings, appurtenances, inspection chambers, manholes, etc…
Place primary backfill material.
Perform required air, hydraulic or other required testing.
Install required house connections and or connections to existing utilities as required.
Place final backfill.

Restore or reinstate surfaces and structures as required.

Carry out final surface works road surfacing curb stone, backing walls, side walk tiling, etc…

Dispose of surplus materials.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 2


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

3- RIGHT OF WAY (ROW)

A. Extent

A.1
All utilities services shall be installed in the right-of-way of existing or proposed roads as shown on the
Drawings.

B. Clearing and Grading

B.1
The ROW shall be used for both access to works sites and for service roads for the pipelines.

B.2
In case the pipe lines run outside existing roads, the ROW shall be cleared and graded to the required
slopes; road cross-sections and all drains, shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

B.3
Road surfacing / resurfacing works shall commence only after completion of pipe installation and
construction of all required works.

4- MATERIALS, PRODUCTS SUPPLY AND HANDLING

A. Structural Materials

A.1
Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.01 "Concrete and Concrete Mixes and
Testing".

A.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 3


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 5.03 "Steel Reinforcement and
Fixing".

B. Products supply requirements

B.1
Manufacturer's certificate: Materials shall be supplied with a certificate for each delivery. The certificate
shall clearly state that products comply with the specified Standards and have been factory tested
accordingly.

B.2
Marking: Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standard products shall have legibly cast, stamped or
indelibly painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
 Manufacturer's name, initials and identification mark.
 Nominal diameter.
 Class designation.
 Initials and number of relevant Standard.
 Length of pipe if shorter than standard length.
 Angle of bends in degrees.
 Date of manufacture.

B.3
Special tests: Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply and transport samples of
materials selected by the Engineer to a testing laboratory. The number of samples shall not exceed 0.5% of
total supplied. However, at least one sample from each class, diameter and manufacturer shall be tested.
Failure of any sample shall be followed by a second and if necessary a third test from the same batch
regardless of whether the limits on number of tests has been exceeded or not. A third test failure shall
result in all material from that manufacturer being rejected and replaced by material from a different
manufacturer, subject to approval and satisfactory tests. Laboratory test report in an approved form must
be provided.

C. Products handling

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 4


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C.1 General

C.1.1
Manufacturer's recommendations on handling, repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, testing and other
works for pipes and fittings shall be strictly followed.

C.1.2
For loading and unloading, the Contractor shall use cranes, hoists or skidways as directed by the Engineer.
Use of hooks, spreader beams, ropes, band or wire slings etc. shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer of each type of pipe and as approved by the Engineer.

C.1.3
Pipes shall be stacked on horizontal surfaces. Pipes shall not be stored on their sockets or jointing
fairlings. End pipes in bottom row shall be secured by chocks. The allowable height of stacks shall be to
the manufacturer's instructions.

C.1.4
Material and equipment shall be handled with care whenever moved by hand, skidways or hoists and any
damage incurred shall result in the material being rejected.

C.1.5
The Contractor shall provide safe storage for the material. The interior surfaces of pipes, fittings etc. shall
be kept free from dirt and foreign matter. Shade for materials shall be provided as required by
manufacturer's instructions and to the Engineer's approval.

C.1.6
Cutting hacksaws, manually operated wheel cutters or pipe cutting machines shall be used as per
manufacturer's instructions. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, special precautions are to be taken to
eliminate airborne particles, methods and equipment shall be used as directed by the Engineer. Ends shall
be prepared according to type of joint used and as per manufacturer's recommendations. Care shall be
taken to avoid any damage to the lining. Minor damage may be repaired on site as directed by the
Engineer.
C.1.7

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 5


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The Contractor shall repair damaged coating, sheathing or lining in accordance with the
Specification and manufacturer's instructions. Material used for repair work shall be compatible with that
originally used. All repair works shall be approved by the Engineer before incorporating materials into the
work.

C.1.8
Bricks and cast iron frames and covers of manholes and chambers and all other construction materials
shall be loaded and unloaded by fitting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. No hooks
shall be used inside pipe. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on
skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against the other pipe or other materials already on the ground.

C.1.9
All materials shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. In distributing the material at
the site of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded opposite or at the nearest possible place where it is to be
laid in the trench.

C.1.10
A space of suitable width, clear of any spoil materials shall be left all along the trench so that no pipes
shall be placed on excavated material.

C.2 GRP Pipes and Fittings

For handling GRP pipes, fittings and rubber ring gaskets, instructions of the manufacturer shall be strictly
adhered to GRP pipes and fittings shall be suitably wedged or braced to prevent damage during shipment
and transportation and rubber rings gaskets and lubricants shall be packed in suitable containers.

The allowable stack height is 2.5 meters. When storing the pipes directly on ground, the ground shall be
free of stones and materials causing any damage.

While lifting, the supports shall be pliable straps or ropes and shall not be steel cables or chains unless
sufficient padding is provided to protect pipes surfaces. Pipes shall never be dropped.
C.3 uPVC Pipes and HDPE Pipes and Fittings

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 6


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly adhered to while handling uPVC pipes and fittings. Extreme
care shall be taken when handling uPVC pipes and fittings.

The pipes shall be loaded using enough supports to avoid any sort of bending, distortion, damage,
scratches to the barrel or ends or any part of pipes and fittings. When off loading, pipes shall be lowered
taking all precautions to avoid bending, distortion, damage, scratches and never be dropped to the ground.
Pipes shall be given adequate and enough supports while stacking. Pipes shall never be stacked in large
piles or under direct sun light to avoid ultraviolet degradation and manufacturer’s instructions shall be
strictly adhered to. Any pipe with ends prepared for jointing shall be stacked in layers with sockets placed
at alternate ends of the stack and with the sockets protruding to avoid unstable stacks.

For long term storage, pipes shall be stored in pipe racks providing continuous support under a shed with
insulated roof and shall never be kept under sunlight to avoid ultraviolet degradation.

Also while loading pipes and fittings, care must be taken to avoid their coming into contact with any sharp
corners such angle irons, sharp steel sheets, and loose nail-heads. While in transit, pipes shall be well
secured over their entire length. While off-loading, care shall be taken that pipes and fittings do not fall
one upon another or to any hard or uneven surfaces. uPVC pipes and fittings shall be transported to the
site in special pile rack type containerized units to facilitate loading, unloading, onsite storage, retrieval
and protection of pipes and fittings from sunlight and ultraviolet radiations.

C.4 Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) Pipe and Vitrified Clay (VC) Pipe

For handling RCC and VC pipes, the instruction of the respective manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to.
RCC and VC pipes shall be handled with great care while transporting to the site and while installing.
Each pipe shall be properly wedged to stop any movement, which may cause damage to the bell and spigot
or tongue and groove ends of the pipes.

Each pipe shall be carefully inspected before being laid and no cracked or defective pipe shall be used.
Chipping of the bell and spigot or tongue and groove pipe ends, which in the Engineer’s opinion may
cause defective joints, shall be avoided. All cracked and defective pipes shall be rejected.
C.5 Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 7


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

All ductile iron pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored strictly according to the instructions of
manufacturer.

Pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, cast iron frames and covers and all other construction materials shall be
loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. No hooks shall be
used inside the pipe. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways
shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe or other materials already on the ground.

In distributing the material at the site of the work, each pipe shall be unloaded opposite or near the place
where it is to be laid in the trench.

Pipe shall be so handled that coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating
or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense according to
manufacturer’s specifications or in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, or be replaced as determined by
the Engineer.

C.6 Rubber Ring Gaskets

All gaskets for vitrified clay (VC), unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC), Glass fiber reinforced
concrete (RC) pipes and fittings shall be handled and stored strictly according to their respective
manufacturer’s instructions.

For storage of gaskets, the storage temperature is to be between + 5˚C and + 25˚C. If stored at low
temperatures and taken out for immediate use, their temperature must be brought to approximately 30˚C
prior to their use. The gaskets are to be protected from direct sunlight and a strong artificial light with
ultraviolet content. The gaskets must be protected from the surrounding air either by wrapping them up or
storing them in hermetically sealed boxes.

D. Materials and Equipment Furnished by the Contractor

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 8


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D.1
The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment that will be incorporated in the works and all
other materials and equipment needed during construction. He shall also furnish such constructional plant
and equipment as in the opinion of the Engineer, is necessary and adequate to perform all work within the
scheduled time for completion.

D.2
The tenderer shall state in the schedule provided in the trade name of materials and equipment he intends
to incorporate in the works as well as the name of the manufacturer and his full address. The Contractor
shall be bound to use the same manufacturer materials and equipment quoted in his Tender.

D.3
The Contractor shall, within 60 days after receipt of the order to commence, submit to the Engineer in
triplicate certified copies of the unpriced agreements with the manufacturers of the materials and
equipment to be used in the works. Such agreements shall embody all the appropriate specification clauses
including testing and inspection and shall state delivery periods.

D.4
Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be brand new and of the type and quality
described in the specification. The Contractor shall procure all materials and equipment, whether specified
or substituted, from eligible sources. Where, because of Employer’s priorities or other causes, materials or
equipment required by the specification become unavailable, substituted materials or equipment may be
used.

D.5
The Engineer’s decision as to whether substitution shall be permitted and as to what substitute materials.

E. Inspection of Materials and Equipment

E.1

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 9


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor which will become a part of the permanent works
shall be subject to inspection at any one or more of the following locations as determined by the Engineer:
at the place of production or manufacture, at the shipping point, or at the site.

E.2
The allow sufficient time to provide for inspection, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, at the
time of issuance, copies in triplicate of purchase orders, including drawings and other pertinent
information, covering materials and equipment on which inspection will be made as advised by the
Engineer, or shall submit other evidence in the event such purchase orders are issued verbally or by letter.
The inspection of materials and equipment or the waiving of the inspection thereof shall in no way relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing materials and equipment meeting the requirements of the
specification.

F. Rejected Materials

F.1 Should any materials, equipment or manufactured articles prove to be, in the judgment of the
Engineer or as a result of testing, unsound or of inferior quality or in any way unsuitable for the works in
which it is proposed to employ them, such materials, equipment or manufactured articles shall not be used
in the works but shall be branded, if in the opinion of the Engineer this is necessary, and shall forthwith be
removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor’s expense and in each case as the Engineer shall
direct.

G. Approved Manufacturer’s Instructions

G.1
The Contractor shall supply the equipment, materials or other items from the approved manufacturers
listed or equal and approved.

G.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 10


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

All equipment or materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturers’ original unopened
containers with the manufacturers’ brand and name clearly marked on.

G.3
All equipment or materials shall be assembled, mixed, fixed, and applied installed or otherwise
incorporated in the works in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer of the equipment
or materials and/or the relevant standards as specified.

H. Certification and Third Party Inspection

H.1
All material provided by Contractor shall be procured from ISO/BS certified manufacturers. The
certificate should cover all the processes associated with the production of the manufactured item and
should be submitted to the Engineer approval with the material submittals by the Contractor. Upon the
request of the

Engineer, the Contractor shall propose an internationally accredited and reputable audit firm to act as a
third party inspector who shall certify that all material manufactured and shipped for the project have been
manufactured and conforms to the specified international standard governing the manufacture of the
finished item / product as specified in the project Tender Documents. The scope of the third party
inspection shall cover at least the quality control tests listed in the forth coming sections of the
Specification. The cost of the third party inspection shall be borne by the Contractor.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 11


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

SECTION 33 31 11 Public Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping

33 31 11.1 MATERIALS

The following paragraph describes the specifications of each of pipes:

33 05 19 Ductile iron pipe (used for force main)

A.1
Ductile iron pipe for pressure shall be to BS EN 598 [6] or equivalent SASO Standards. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Bill of Quantities or the Drawings, Class K9 shall be used for all pipe diameters, and in the
case where pressure does not exceed 16 bars for large diameters, class K8 pipes shall be used.

A.2
Ductile iron fittings shall be to BS EN545 [1] or ISO 2531or equivalent with socket / spigot ends. Joint
deflection at installation shall not exceed 50% of the maximum allowed by manufacturer.
A.3
Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used for straight runs and adjacent to elbows or fittings. These
joints shall be provided with rubber gaskets, and an external thrust block is required at elbows or fittings.
Anchored or self restrained joints shall be used for sections adjacent to elbows in areas where space is
restricted or indicated on the Drawings or BOQ. Anchored joints are to be push-in, self anchored type able
to take up the axial forces thus allowing concrete thrust blocks to be dispensed with. The Contractor shall
submit calculations verifying the number of restrained joints required noting that pipe pressure testing will
be made when pipes are partially backfilled and joints are exposed.

A.4
Rubber gasket to BS/EN 545 or ISO 4633.

A.5
Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have screwed-on or cast-on flanges to sustain working pressure of
NP 16 minimum.

A.6
Flanges shall conform to BS 4504 [2].
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 12
SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A.7
Factory protection for pipes:

Pipes shall be internally lined with cement and aluminum oxide to ISO 7186 or BS 4027 or
equivalent in addition to polyurethane sheets lining with 2 mm thickness according to the
detailed specification in Item (A-8) below. Externally, pipe shall be coated with metallic
zinc to BS EN 545 [1] or ISO 8179 or equivalent and followed by a bitumen nontoxic coat
to BS 3416 [4] or ISO 8179 or equivalent.

A.8 Additional Site Protection for Metal Pipes (high corrosion areas)

A.8.1
Polyurethane Coating

The coating shall be 100% solid polyurethane consists of two components: one isocyanides-rich solution
and one oplyol-rich solution. The coating shall be completely continuous and free from all holidays,
voids, pinholes or other defects. The test certificate shall state the property of the coating and shall specify
the test method used. The polyurethane coating system shall comply with the data included in the
following Tables:

Technical Data of Polyurethane External Coating

Material Polyurethane, 2 Components airless applicator


Color Black
Density 1.6g/mm3
Tensile Strength 25N/ mm3
Adhesion to Steel > 8Mpa (Stee grit blasted SA21/2)
Dielectric Strength 200 Kv/cm
Water Absorption 3.5% at 25C
Impact Resistance > 15Nm
Temperature Resistance 90C continuous
Salt Water Spray No effect after 1000hrs
Elongation > 10%

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 13


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Chemical Resistance Water solution of salts, acids, and bases of pH 1-14


Thickness 1-1.5mm

A.8.2
Polyethylene Sleeves

Protective polyethylene sleeves shall be used with all DI pipes and fittings to be installed in buried
condition and shall be in accordance with ISO 8180.

The minimum nominal thickness of the sleeve shall be 0.010 inch (250 microns) with a maximum minus
tolerance of 10%.
The material shall be made from a polymer with a melt flow index as measured according to BS 2782, of
10 or less and a density in the range of 0.915 to 925g/ml. The sleeve shall be free from pinholes, gels,
undispersed raw materials and particles of foreign matter. The film may not contain more than 5% by
weight of material other than polyethylene.
Polyethylene sleeving shall be stored in cool dry store away from direct sunlight or excessive heat, the
length of the roll, the pipe size for which it is intended.

A.8.3
Repair of Coating and Lining
In case of repairs are needed the Contractor shall take immediate action to correct the situation.
All the repairs to the coated or lined pipe and fitting shall be at the Contractor own expense.
The Contractor shall submit the repair procedure to the Employer for approval.
The procedure shall comply with the manufacturer specification.

A.8.4
Anti-Corrosion Pipe Wrapping Tape

The tape shall be supplied 150 mm or 225 mm wide in 15 m or 25 m rolls, or approved by Engineer
depending upon the requirements.
 Pipe diameters up to 200mm, 150mm width tape shall be used.

 Pipe diameters above 200mm, 225mm width tape shall be used.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 14


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The adhesive compound shall be of the pressure sensitive type (that is, not requiring a primer in order to
achieve bond to the substrata) and shall have thickness between 0.75 to 0.90 mm. Flow coefficient of
bitumen viscosity at 200˚C and 175˚C shall be 5.5 poise and 7.5 poise respectively.
The tape shall be supplied with a wider high quality silicon release paper covering complete tape. Both
sides of the tape shall have a minimum of 5mm wider silicon release paper to prevent edge
contamination.
During storage at maximum storage temperature of 500 C for six months, the adhesive material shall not
flow out of the release paper and there shall not be any end blocking.
Wrapping tape shall be marked with the following information:
 Manufacturers name & logo

 Date of manufacture

 Width of the tape


 Batch number

A.8.5
Wrapping Procedure
To increase the wrapping protection efficiency, pipe diameters up to 300mm must be wrapped using
semi-automatic tape wrapping machine and for pipe diameters above 300mm, fully automatic wrapping
machine should be used.

A.8.6
Storage

Wrapping tape should be stored in dry, cool, well ventilated condition, out of direct sunlight.

A.8.7
Packing

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 15


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Roll shall be placed in a cardboard carton in layers in vertical position. A proper separator for safe
storage shall separate each layer. The boxes shall be marked at two places given name and logo of
manufacturer, tender no., type, size and quantity of material in black/blue color letters with a minimum
height of 50mm.
The wrapping tape shall also conform to the following specifications given below;
Data Sheet

S. No. Property Test Method Unit Data


1 Color - - -
1.1 Backing - - Blue RAL
5000/5001/
5005/5010/2017
1.2 Adhesive Compound - - Black
1.3 Release Paper - - White / Cream
3 Backing Thickness Min. - mm 0.75
4 Total Thickness Min. - mm 1.5
5 Elongation BS 2782 % 270
6 Tensile Strength Tape BS 2782 N/mm2 14.8
2
7 Modules BS2782 N/mm 50
8 Tear Strength ASTM D1004 N 50
9 Impact Resistance (Two Layers) DIN 30627 Nm 15
Viscosity at 200˚C Cone & Plate Poise 5.5
Viscosity at 175˚C Cone & Plate Poise 7.5
11 Adhesion to Steel ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
12 Adhesion to Tape ASTM D 1000 N/mm 2.75
Electrical
13 Dielectric Strength BS 2782 kV 30
2
14 Insulation Resistance ASTM D 257 Ohm/cm 1012
15 Cathodic Disbondment ASTM G 8 mm2 NIL
General
16 Water Vapor permeability BS 2782 g/m2/24h 0.4
17 Water Absorption ASTM D 570 % 0.1
18 Bacterial Growth Disbondment - - NIL

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 16


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

S. No. Property Test Method Unit Data


Temperature
19 For Wrapping - ˚C 0 to + 50
20 In Service - ˚C 0 to + 50
21 For Storage - ˚C Up to + 50
A.9 Factory protection for fittings:

Fittings shall be coated internally and externally as per EN 545 Clause 4-5 with minimum epoxy content
70% and minimum thickness 10 mil. Fittings shall be internally coated with fusion bonded epoxy.

A.10 Testing on Ductile Iron Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on samples from every batch of DI pipes delivered to site. A report
of the third party inspector shall cover at least these tests all as approved by the Engineer. All tests shall be
carried out according to BS/EN545 or ISO 2531 equivalent:
 Visual inspection
 Microscopic structure

 Tensile strength
 Elongation
 Brinell hardness
 Lining thickness
 Composition and thickness of external coating
 Ring bending and detachment of lining for pipes > 500 mm diameter
 Hydrostatic test

33 05 31.11 Polyvinyl Chloride Gravity Sewer pipes (UPVC) (house connection or main pipes)

B.1

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 17


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Pipes shall conform to DIN 8061 / 8062 with a minimum of class 6 bar or standard dimension ratio (SDR)
of 41. Concrete encasement shall be added to pipes with covers less than 1.0m or more than 6.0m.

B.2
Fittings and joints shall comply with ISO 4422 or BS EN 1452 [9] Part 3 or DIN 8063 or equivalent and
manufactured from same material of pipe.

B.3
Joints shall be to DIN 8063 part 1, socket spigot with rubber sealing rings shall be to BS EN 681-2 [10].

B.4
The following test shall be carried out on samples from every batch of PVC pipes delivered to site. The
report of the third party inspector shall cover at least the following tests as requested by DIN 8061/8062:

Visual inspection
Pipe diameter / roundness
Wall thickness
Hydrostatic test
Stress resistance tests

Impact test
Elevated temperature cycling test
Resistance to sulfuric acid

B.5
Pipes and fittings shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun at all times by means of reflective
cover sheets.

33 05 33.12 HDPE Gravity Sewer Pipeline (house connection or main pipes)

F.1 STANDARDS

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 18


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

All activities relating to this section of the specification shall comply with the following or approved equal
standards.
ASTM D638:
Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics. ASTM D790 Standard test methods for
flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials.
ASTM D1238
Standard test method for melt flow rates of thermo- plastics by extrusion plastometer.
ASTM D1505
Standard test method for density of plastics by the density-gradient technique.
ASTM D1693
Standard test method for environmental stress-cracking of ethylene plastics.
ASTM D2240
Standard test method for rubber property-Durometer hardness.
ASTM F1055
Standard specification for electrofusion type polyethylene fittings for outside diameter controlled
polyethylene pipe and tubing.

BS EN 727
Plastics piping and ducting systems. Thermoplastics pipes and fittings. Extermination of Vicat softening
temperature.
BS EN 728
Plastics piping and ducting systems. Polyolefin pipes and fittings. Determination of
oxidation induction time.
BS EN 744
Plastics piping and ducting systems. Thermoplastic pipes. Test method for resistance to external blows by
the round-the-clock method.
BS EN 1053
Plastics piping systems. Thermoplastics piping systems for non-pressure applications. Test methods
for water tightness.
BS EN 1437
Plastics piping systems. Piping systems for underground drainage and sewerage Test method for
resistance to combined temperature cycling and external loading.
BS EN 12061
Plastic piping systems. Thermoplastics fittings. Test method for impact resistance.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 19


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

BS EN 12256
Plastic piping systems. Thermoplastic fittings. Test method for mechanical strength or
flexibility of fabricated fittings.
BS EN ISO 9967
Thermoplastics pipes. Determination of creep ratio
BS EN ISO 20088-3
Plastics. Determination of resistance to environmental stress cracking (ESC). Bent strip method.
DIN 8074
Polyethylene (PE) – Pipes PE63, PE80, PE100, PE-HD.Dimensions
ISO 161
Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Nominal outside diameters and nominal pressures
ISO 527
Plastics. Determination of tensile properties.

ISO 1133
Plastics. Determination of the melt mass-flow rate (MFR) and the melt volume-flow rate (MVR) of
thermoplastics
ISO 1167
Thermoplastics pipes, fittings and assemblies for the conveyance of fluids. Determination of resistance to
internal pressure
ISO 1183-3
Plastics. Methods for determining the density of non- cellular plastics. Gas konometer method.
ISO 2505
Thermoplastics pipes. Longitudinal reversion
ISO 4427
Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply .Specifications.
ISO 6964
Polyolefin pipes and fittings. Determination of carbon black content by calcination or pyrolysis Test
method and basic specification

ISO 9000
Quality management systems

ISO 11922

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 20


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Thermoplastic pipes for the conveyance of fluids. Dimensions and tolerances.

ISO 13479
Polyolefin pipes for conveyance of fluids – Determination of resistance to crack propagation
Test method for slow crack growth on notched pipes
ISO 13967
Thermoplastics fittings. Determination of ring stiffness. ISO 18553 Method for assessment of the
degree of pigment or carbon black dispersion in polyolefin pipes, fittings and compounds
WIS 4-24-01
Specification for mechanical fittings and joints for polyethylene pipes for nominal sizes 90 to 1000.

F.2 SUBMITTALS
F.2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS APPROVAL
a) In order to verify compliance with the specification the Contractor shall submit information for all
products and materials used in the Works to the Engineer for approval sufficiently in advance of their use
in accordance with the Contract programmer allowing for ordering and approval times. Reference shall
also be made to Section 01000-09 of the specification on products and materials approval. Information to
be submitted shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to:

i. The manufacturers design calculations, complete and detailed specification and test results
of the proposed HDPE pipes and fittings required for the Works including manufacturer’s
certificates of compliance with this section of the standard specification. Information on
all items listed in Table 1.4.1 below shall be given for every diameter in each class of
pipe.
ii. Should any details of the pipes and fittings be altered in any way during manufacture from
those proposed and approved by the Engineer, submit for the Engineer's approval the
revised details and test results.
iii. Submit to the Engineer the results of all quality control tests carried out on the
manufactured pipes and fittings as soon as practicable after testing as and in any case not
later than the time of delivery of the relevant pipes and fittings to the site.

Product Information for HDPE Pipe and Fittings

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 21


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Product Information Units


Manufacturing Details
Name of manufacturer -
Manufacturing process for pipes -
Manufacturing process for bends and fittings -
Joint type -
Details of all additives used in the manufacture -
Polymer classification and certificate of origin -
Summary of Design Criteria
Rated working pressure MPa
Design test pressure (165hrs or 100 hrs) MPa
Internal vacuum pressure MPa
Minimum required strength (MRS) MPa
Pipe Details
Nominal external diameter mm
Wall thickness mm
Standard dimension ratio (SDR) -
Standard pipe length m

F.2.2 METHOD STATEMENTS


a) The Contractor shall submit method statements to the Engineer for approval 4 weeks in advance of
commencing the site activity in accordance with Section 01000-07 of the specification. These shall
comprise but not necessarily be limited to:
i. Procedures for handling, storage and installation of pipes.
ii. Procedures for building pipes into concrete structures.
iii. Hydrostatic testing procedures for HDPE pressure pipelines.
F.2.3 DRAWINGS.
a) The Contractor shall submit drawings to the Engineer for approval in advance of commencing the site
activity in accordance with Section 01000-07 of the specification. These shall comprise but not
necessarily be limited to:
b) Drawings of the pipes, fittings, joints, pipe specials and the assembly thereof.
c) Pipe laying diagram and schedule showing location, length, design designation and designation by
number of each pipe section and pipe special to be furnished and installed.
d) All data on curve and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment.

F.3 QUALITY CONTROL

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 22


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

a) Prior to dispatch of any product and/or material from source the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer in writing in sufficient time to allow the Engineer the opportunity to
inspect and test the product and/or material prior to delivery in accordance with Section
01000-08 of the specification.

b) Products and materials shall be from a manufacturer/supplier who operates a quality


system which is registered to ISO 9000 series or approved equal.
c) To allow the Engineer to inspect the Works the Contractor shall give the Engineer a
minimum of 24 hours notice of carrying out the following activities on site:

i. Installation of pipeline.
ii. Hydrostatic testing of pipeline.

F.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


a) Delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, Section 01000-09 of the specification and the following
provisions.

i. Delivery storage and handling shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid product
damage and be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

ii. Pipes and fittings shall not come in contact with any sharp projections that may
cause damage to the pipes and fittings during transportation loading and unloading.
Ensure that pipes and fittings are well secured during transit and adequately supported
along their length. Do not allow pipe to overhang the end of a vehicle during
transportation.
iii. Ensure that pipes and fittings are lifted using nylon or large diameter rope slings
positioned at a quarter of the pipe length from each end. Do not allow the use of wire rope
chains or unpadded forks or clamps on forklifts to lift pipes.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 23


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

iv. Store pipes and fittings on a flat level area as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Ensure that pipes and fittings supplied either on pallets or crated, remain on the pallets
or in their crates until required.
v. Stack non-crated pipes to the approval of the Engineer.

Stack pipes of different sizes and thickness separately.


Do not allow stacked pipes to exceed 2m in height or as recommended by the
supplier whichever is the lesser.

vi. The Contractor shall visually inspect all products upon delivery to site and report any
damage to the Engineer.

- Any products damaged during delivery, storage and handling shall be marked by the
Contractor and set aside.
- Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer
for approval.
- Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the
Engineer shall be removed from site and replaced.
- Scratching or scoring of pipe surface to a depth greater or equal to 10% of wall thickness
shall constitute an automatic rejection of that pipe section.

F.5 PRODUCTS
F.5.1 HDPE PIPES AND FITTINGS

a) Pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from polyethylene containing only those antioxidants, UV
stabilizers and pigments necessary for the manufacture of pipes conforming to specification ISO 4427 and
for its end use, including walkability when it is possible. Minimum content of carbon black shall be 2,4%

b) All HDPE pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from material conforming to polymer classification
PE100 with a minimum of class 8 bar or standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 21. Having a minimum
required strength value (MRS) of 10MPa at 50 years and 20oC in accordance with ISO 4427. Design
stress shall be 8MPa. Pipes shall have a standard dimension ratio (SDR, outside diameter/wall thickness)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 24


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

of either 11 or 17 unless indicated otherwise by Engineer. Material shall be procured from the
manufacturer accepted to PE100+ Association.

c) The pipes and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign
inclusions, voids and other injurious defects.

d) Butt fusion fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D3261 and shall be manufactured by injection
moulding, a combination of extrusion and machining, or fabricated from PE pipe conforming to this
specification. Fabricated fittings shall be manufactured using a Data logger to record fusion pressure and
temperature. Butt fusion fittings shall have a pressure rating no less than that of the pipe. The fittings shall
be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids and other injurious
defects.

e) Electrofusion fittings shall be manufactured from the same base resin as the pipe to ASTM F1055 and
shall have a pressure rating no less than that of the pipe.

f) Flanged and mechanical joint adaptors shall be manufactured to WIS 4-


24-01 and have a pressure rating no less than that of the pipe.

g) Pipes and fittings shall be fabricated to be capable of withstanding the working pressures, test pressures
and loadings specified.

h) Pipes and fittings must be designed to achieve a minimum working life of


50 years under all applicable loadings, environmental and installation conditions.

i) Pipes and fittings shall be suitable for carrying raw sewage, treated sewage effluent, surface water and
potable water at temperatures up to
40oC as appropriate for the particular application.

j) Nominal outside diameters of pipes and fittings shall conform to ISO 161 and the tolerances on these
diameters shall be in accordance with ISO11922.

k) Only fittings supplied or recommended by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer shall
be used. Fittings shall be installed in accordance with the approved method statement.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 25


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

l) The pipe shall contain no recycled compounds.


m) The properties of the polymer, extruded pipe and fittings shall be as shown in Tables below.

HDPE Resin Properties


Test Method Test Method
Property Required Value European ASTM

Density >940kg/m3 ISO 1183-3 D1505

Melt mass flow index or rate >0.03g/10min ISO 1133 D1238 4


(2.16) condition 4
Melt mass flow index or rate >0.30g/10min ISO 1133 D1238 5
(5.00) condition 5
Melt mass flow index or rate >8g/10min ISO 1133 D1238 6
(21.6) condition 6
Environmental stress crack >250hrs BS EN ISO 20088 D1693
resistance (10% stabilizer)
Resistance to internal pressure ISO 4427
>165hrs DIN 8047 -
Oxidation induction time (2000C) >20mins BS EN 728 -

Flexural creep modulus >900MPa - D790

Shore D hardness (400C) >50 - D2240

Tensile strength at yield >20MPa ISO 527 D638


(50mm/min)
Elongation at break >600% ISO 527 -

Modulus of elasticity >1000MPa - -

Charpy impact No break - -

Vicat softening point >1250C BS EN 727 -

Thermal expansion (20-900C) <0.20mm/m/0C - -

Thermal conductivity (200C) <0.6W/mK - -

Carbon black content >2.4 ISO 6964

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 26


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Carbon black dispersion ≤60µm (grade 3) ISO 18533

HDPE Pipe Properties

Required Test Method Test Method


Property Value European ASTM

Density >940kg/m3 ISO 1183-3 D1505

Melt mass flow index or rate (5.00kg, >0.30g/10min ISO 1133 D1238 5

1900C) condition 1T
Defects shall
Oven test not develop ISO 12091
Resistance to internal pressure No failure or ISO 1167 -

(200C, water in water, hoop stress defects ISO 4427

12 4
Resistance100h )1 pressure
to internal No failure or ISO 1167 -

(800C, water in water, hoop stress defects ISO 4427

1
Resistance to internal pressure No failure or ISO 1167 -

(800C, water in water, hoop stress defects ISO 4427

1
Creep ratio >900MPa BS EN ISO 9967 -

Longitudinal reversion (1000C) <3% ISO 2505 -

Shore D hardness >50 - D2240

Tensile strength at yield (50mm/min) >20MPa ISO 527 D638

Elongation at break >350% ISO 527 -

Ring flexibility Refer standard BS EN 1446 -

Impact strength TIR 10% BS EN 744 -

Ring stiffness To SN or SD BS EN ISO 9969 -


required
Ovality Grade N ISO 11922

Thermal stability (2000C) 20mins BS EN 728 -


SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 27
SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Notch test (at 500 hours) Refer Standard ISO 13479

Legend to Table
1) Either on pipe or from sample pipe using same resin and process.

HDPE Injection Molded Fittings Properties

Test Method Test Method


Property Required Value European ASTM

Density >940kg/m3 ISO 1183-3 D1505

Melt mass flow index or rate <1.6g/10min ISO 1133 D1238

(5.00kg, 1900C) condition 1T


Stiffness As required ISO 13967 -

Impact Refer standard BS EN 12061 -

Mechanical strength or flexibility Refer standard BS EN 12256

Thermal stability (2000C) >20mins BS EN 728 -

Resistance to internal pressure No failure ISO 1167 -

(800C, water in water, hoop stress ISO 4427

1
Resistance to internal pressure No failure ISO 1167 -

(800C, water in water, hoop stress ISO 4427

1
Water tightness No leakage EN 1053 -

Legend to Table
1) For moulded materials use either an injection moulded or extruded
pipe from same materials.

F.5.2 QUALITY CONTROL TESTS

a) The routine factory quality control tests listed below shall be carried out at the required frequencies and
records of all tests and inspections shall be maintained by the manufacturer. The Engineer shall be
provided with two copies of all test certificates and reports.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 28
SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

i. Quality testing of all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the relevant
specification.
ii. Control of processing parameters in terms of temperature, pressure, flow rates, haul-off
speed and energy input.
iii. Visual inspection of the pipes to check general appearance, dimensional compliance and
any indication of inclusions or processing flows in pipe barrels and joining ends.
iv. Production short-term tests to identify any variations in the plant functioning.
v. The following tests shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards in order to
ensure the quality of the extruded pipes:

Melt mass-flow rate of raw material.


Density of raw material.
Carbon black content.
Carbon black dispersion.
Long-term stress crack resistance at 80°C.
Long-term MRS at 20°C on the raw material (data not older that24 months)
Appearance.
Long term hydrostatic test at 20°C. (100hrs test)
Welding.
Slow tear test
Oxidation induction time value.
Visual inspection of pipes.
Dimensional check of pipes.
Heat reversion of pipes.
Hydrostatic creep strength tests of pipes.
Bend test / reverse bend test

b) When conditioning is required for laboratory tests, condition the specimens in accordance with the
appropriate standard.

c) Tensile testing for pipe resin, pipes and welds shall be performed on an approved tensilometer capable
of delivering safely and accurately 120 % of the stress required by the sample. The tensilometer shall be

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 29


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

connected to a computerized system capable of delivering information in data and graphical form. The
information required from tensile measurements are tensile strength at yield and peak and elongation at
yield and peak.

i. Test specimens shall be milled to exact size using approved designated milling machines.
Each specimen shall be measured to an accuracy of 10 microns
ii. The Contractor shall submit statistical analysis based on minimum sample populations of
32. Cumulative analysis based on overall and on individual pipe resin batch based data
shall also be provided.
iii. Welded samples shall be visually examined after tensile testing for signs of adequate
bonding and ductile and brittle failure. Weld samples with greater than 25 % brittle failure
shall be rejected.
iv. Tensile graphs indicating brittle failure shall be considered as failures.

d) The selection of samples of pipe, resin and welds for testing shall be as directed by the Engineer.

e) If the results of any test fail to meet the requirements of this specification, the test shall be repeated
once again. If, upon retest, failure occurs, the batch quantity of product represented by the test shall be
rejected.

f) The Contractor shall conduct quality checks at the manufacturer’s premises to ensure that the in-process
manufacturing quality checks are being conducted correctly and at the stated frequency. Test certificates
relating to the batch shall be furnished to the Engineer before acceptance of the delivery. The
test certificates shall contain all the details in the agreed format of reporting
g) Marking shall be applied to the pipe in such a manner that it is legible after installation and durable
throughout the construction period. Each standard and random length of pipe and every fitting shall be
marked before dispatch from the pipe manufacturer’s works as required in ISO 4427 and as follows:

i. The manufacturer’s name, initials, or trade mark.


ii. The dimensions nominal outside diameter X nominal wall thickness
iii. The outside diameter tolerance.
iv. The designation of the pipe material. v. The nominal pressure.
vi. The pipe series.
vii. The date of manufacture and batch number.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 30


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

viii. Stencil in legible letters the pipe identification number on the inside and outside at each end.
Ensure that the same number appears on all record sheets and documents relating to the
manufacture, delivery and testing of that pipe.
ix. The manufacturing standard.

F.6 EXECUTION
F.6.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
a) Trench excavation shall be carried out in accordance with Section 02130 of the specification.

b) Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

i. Provide qualification details of the manufacturer's technical expert to be assigned to the


Contract. The technical expert shall have expertise, experience and skills necessary for
advising and monitoring all aspects of transport, storage, handling, installation and testing
of pipes as appropriate.
ii. The technical expert shall provide comprehensive technical assistance to the
Contractor throughout the Contract and regularly monitor the Contractor's activities and
report on shortcomings.
iii. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer and ADSSC copies of all instructions advice or
reports given by the manufacturer's technical
expert to him. The technical expert shall immediately inform the Engineer and ADSSC of
any omission, variations and detractions from the specification.

c) The pipeline shall be within 20mm of the specified line and the invert level shall be within 6mm of the
specified value and shall be such that there is no backfill at any point on a gravity pipeline.
d) Install bedding, surround and backfill in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s requirements or if
not given as specified in Section 02120 of the specification and shown on the drawings.
e) Install appurtenant facilities on the pipeline such as manholes, valve chambers as
specified in Section 02300 of the specification.
f) Lay pipes from downstream to upstream unless agreed otherwise with the Engineer.
g) HDPE pipelines can accommodate gradual changes of direction in the vertical and
horizontal plane. However the pipe should not normally be bent to a radius less than 25
times the outside diameter of the pipe.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 31


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

h) When cut pipe is required, ensure that the cutting is done by a machine, leaving a smooth
cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
i) Ensure that all pipes and fittings are sound and clean before laying.
When pipe laying is not in progress, ensure that the pipe ends are at all times fitted with
watertight plugs or caps. The plugs or caps shall only be removed for the purposes of
making a connection of the pipe end or testing the pipeline. The plugs or cap shall be
replaced immediately on completion of the test.

F.6.2 BUTT FUSION JOINTING


a) Butt fusion jointing shall only be used to join pipes of the same PE material with
compatible MFR and with the same nominal wall thickness and outside diameter. The
following procedures shall serve as a general guide only. The Contractor shall obtain
detailed jointing instructions from the manufacturer who shall have a technical
representative available at the Engineer’s request during the jointing process.

i. The butt fusion machine should be sited within a shelter and the ends of the pipe being
joined should be covered or plugged to prevent through drafts.
ii. Each component that is to be fused should be held in position in the purpose built
clamping jig. The lengths of pipe hanging outside the jig should be supported by means of
roller cradles.
iii. The pipe ends should be faced so that the finished surfaces are perfectly smooth free of
visible ridges, valleys or other surface imperfections.
iv. The outside diameters of the pipe ends should match closely without the offset
exceeding 10%
v. The pipe ends should be heated to the pipe manufacturer’s recommended
temperature and interfacial pressure The Contractor should use a pyrometer or other
surface temperature measuring device to confirm and record the actual surface
temperature for each weld. Temperature indicating crayons should not come into contact
with the surface to be welded.
vi. After the pipe ends have been properly melted, the heater tool should be removed within
the specified time. The molten pipe ends should be brought together and allowed to cool
without disturbance to form the permanent weld. The proper bead size and geometry
specified for the pipe being welded should be formed.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 32


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F.6.3 SADDLE/SIDEWALL JOINTING


a) Saddle /sidewall fusion jointing shall be accomplished by using a mechanical saddle
fusion machine that has been designed for this purpose to ensure proper alignment,
temperature and force control. The following procedures shall serve as a general guide only.
The Contractor shall obtain detailed jointing instructions from the manufacturer who shall
have a technical representative available at the Engineer’s request during the jointing
process.

i. Any dirt or coating that might interfere with the proper operation of the saddle fusion
machine should be removed from the pipe and the surfaces of the pipe and saddle
roughened to expose fresh material and any reside brushed away.
ii. Test fit the saddle fusion machine to ensure that alignment and contact are as they should
be.
iii. Commence the fusion process and periodically verify the surface temperature using a
pyrometer or other surface temperature measuring device. If temperature indicating
crayons are used, they should not be used on a surface which comes into contact with the
surfaces to be welded.
iv. After the heating period, remove the heater plate and check for the correct melt pattern on
both the fitting and the pipe. Join the fitting to the pipe with the prescribed fusion force.
v. Cool the joint without disturbance until the melt has formed a permanent weld. The
joint should not be subjected to any external stresses until the fusion joint has cooled.

F.6.4 ELECTROFUSION JOINTING


a) Electrofusion jointing involves heating the electrofusion joint internally, either by a wire
coil at the interface of the joint or by a conductive polymer. Heat is created by an electric
current passed to the conductive material in the fitting.

i. Ensure that the fitting is dimensionally appropriate for welding to the pipe. Clean the pipe
surface in the joint area. Cut the end of the pipe square. Mark on the pipe surface the
proper position of the fitting to be installed. Scrape the surface of pipe area to be joined,
removing all surface degradation and contamination. Avoid contamination of the scraped
pipe surfaces.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 33


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

ii. Place the pipe and fitting in the clamping fixture to prevent movement of the pipe or
fitting.
iii. Connect the electrofusion control box to the fitting and to the power source. Apply
electric current to the fitting as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions. Turn off the
current when the proper time has elapsed to heat the joint properly.

iv. Allow the joint to cool for the recommended time and remove the clamping fixtures. Do
not remove prematurely from the clamps as any strain on a joint that has not fully cooled
can be detrimental to joint performance

F.6.5 MECHANICAL JOINTS AND FITTINGS


a) Many types of mechanical connection styles and methods exist. The Contractor shall
submit suitable mechanical joints. All such joints shall be recommended and acceptance
tested by the manufacturer of the pipe. Where marked on the drawings end-load resistant
fittings of an approved type shall be used.

b) When tightening polyethylene flanges care shall be taken to produce an equal torque load
to the limits given by the manufacturer. A torque wrench shall be used. Since polyethylene
creeps under load it is essential that the bolts are re-tightened several times prior to
commissioning to minimize the risk of leakage.

c) All joint materials and gaskets shall be suitable for use in the prevailing climate, soil,
ground water, potable water and irrigation water conditions.

F.6.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

a) Proposed methods and program for testing, including details of test equipment, shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. All tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer or other
person appointed by the Owner. All equipment necessary for carrying out testing and
cleaning including water, pumps, gauges and calibration certificates, piped connections, stop
ends and all other temporary works shall be provided prior to commencement of testing.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 34


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

b) In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests, which may be specified
elsewhere, submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test. Carry out at any stage of
construction other tests that the Engineer considers desirable to check materials and
workmanship on the pipeline. Ensure that the obligations to perform successful tests
under the Contract are achieved.

c) Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning. The Contractor must make
his own arrangement for the supply and disposal of water used for testing which must be
obtained from a source accepted by the Engineer.

d) The pipeline shall be tested in sections as the Engineer may direct or permit. Each section
shall be tested separately. Testing shall not be carried out against closed valves.
e) Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing the openings in
pipelines to be tested. Use fittings adequately strutted to withstand the pressure specified.

f) Where multiple pipelines are laid in common trench, test only one line at any one time.

g) The pipeline shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing.

h) Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of not less than 100mm
and a full scale reading not greater than twice the specified test pressure. Before any gauge is
used, arrange for independent laboratory to check the accuracy of the gauge. Provide a dated
certificate of its accuracy to the Engineer.

i) Before pressure testing commences pipes and valves shall be rechecked for
cleanliness and the operation of all valves shall be rechecked. The open ends of the pipeline,
or sections thereof, shall be blanked off and additionally secured where necessary by
temporary struts and wedges. All anchor and thrust blocks shall be completed and all pipe
straps and other devices intended to prevent the movement of pipes shall be in place.

j) Tables for pressure testing and for make-up water for testing at elevated temperatures
between 230C up to 400C shall be provided by the resin manufacturer of the pipe.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 35


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

k) When the temperature of the pipe wall, test water and air temperature are all less than
35oC the test pressure shall be 1.5 times the rated pressure of the lowest rated component in
the section of pipeline under test.

l) Pipelines that have been pressurized and depressurized shall be kept depressurized for a
period of at least 12 hours to stress relax before applying pressure again

m) During summer months all pressure testing shall be carried out when ambient
temperatures are at their lowest in order to avoid excessive stresses on the pipe during testing.
Exposed areas of pipe in trenches, such as at joint locations, shall be shaded during hydraulic
testing at all times throughout the year.

n) The fill and test position shall be located at the lowest point of the pipeline profile to
encourage the expulsion of air as the pipe is being filled. Adequate air release mechanisms
shall be sited at all high points. An air bleed shall be incorporated as close to the crown of the
pipe at the highest point and at each end of the test section.

o) The pipeline shall be filled taking all appropriate precautions to avoid air entrapment as
the presence of air could invalidate the test. The pipeline shall then be left to stabilize for a
minimum of 3 hours and air released as necessary by opening the bleed valves
p) Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints during the tests

q) Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under working pressure.

F.6.7 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENT OF PIPELINES


a) Deflection measurement of pipelines shall be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer,
but the Contractor shall be deemed to have included for deflection testing in his rates.

b) Excavation for or laying of HDPE pipelines shall not proceed until an approved device for
gauging pipe deflections is on site.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 36


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

i. Use a suitable mechanized device to the approval of the Engineer for gauging pipe
deflections. Maintain devices for gauging pipe deflections in good working order.
Submit calibration certificates before every period of use. For pipes of 600mm diameter
and greater. Measure deflection by physical entry into the pipes. Use a regularly calibrated
telescopic spring loaded graduated rod to measure percentage deflections in each
diameter. Provide a suitable trolley to facilitate access into the pipe. Record all
measurements.

c) The pipeline shall be inspected for deflection and orality immediately after 600 mm of the
soil envelope has been placed to obtain a reference status. The final deflection shall be taken
30 days after the backfill has been built up to final ground level. The Contractor is advised to
check for deflection at all times so that he may make corrections during the backfill
construction phase.

d) When fully installed and completely backfilled to ground level the deflection
inclusive of any initial orality shall not be more than 5.0 % based on the base outside
diameter and measured 30 days after installation.

e) If the visual inspection or the deflection test indicates excess deflection, the Contractor
shall determine the exact cause of the deflection before proposing a remedy.

i. Isolated areas of severe deflection may be the result of construction loads being on the
pipe before adequate cover has been placed. These areas may be able to be re-rounded
with special equipment without any excavation. Long lengths of pipe with high deflection
levels may be indicative of overall installation deficiencies. The Contractor shall submit
proposals for corrective action in the event of unacceptable deflection or upon indications
of poor installation likely to cause future distress to the pipeline
ii. Depending on the severity, the material around the pipe may have to be excavated and
replaced with the recommended backfill and compacted. Provided the pipe has not
deflected to the point of reverse curvature, it may be allowed to be returned to its original
round shape before acceptance.

33 05 36.24 Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Pipe (GRP)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 37


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D.1
Use GRP pipes for sewer networks with minimum stiffness 5000 N/m2

D.2
Pipes and fittings shall be to BS 5480, 1990 [11] or AWWA C950-01/ or equivalent.

D.3
Pipe and fittings shall include a corrosion resistant internal liner, a structural wall and a resin rich exterior
surface.

D.4
The liner consists of 90% resin and 10% glass reinforcement and shall have a nominal thickness of 1.0
mm. The liner inner surface in contact with liquid shall be 0.2 mm thick and shall be reinforced with "C"
glass.

The remainder of the liner thickness, shall consist of 60% resin and 40% glass reinforcement which shall
be acid resistant chopped "E" glass to BS 3496 or glass fiber rovings to BS 3691.

D.5
The pipe structural wall shall consist of glass reinforcement, and fine silica sand, all impregnated with
resin. The fine silica sand shall be added to the structural layer to achieve the design thickness for the
required stiffness specified such that the overall hoop flexural modulus (E) for pipe is not less than 24
GN/m2. Silica sand and filler content shall not exceed 50%. Continuous glass filament reinforcement in the
structure wall shall be 10% minimum by weight.

D.6
Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich outer layer reinforced with one layer of "C" glass veil. The
exterior layer shall have a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm. The layer shall consist of resin rich 90% and
reinforced with one layer of C glass 10%.

D.7

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 38


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The resin used for the corrosion resistant internal liner of the pipe and fittings shall be high grade polyester
resin (vinyl ester) type. For the structural wall and exterior layer of the pipe a high grade isophthalic
polyester resin shall be used. No dark pigments shall be used in the pipe or fittings. All resins shall be
tested to ASTM C-581.

D.8
All glass reinforcements except for the inner and outer surfaces of the pipe and fittings shall be of the "E"
type. Surface reinforcement shall be of the "C" glass type.

D.9
Pipes shall be designed for a life of not less than 50 years. Contractor shall submit calculations for initial
and long term deflection with Truck loads, Buckling, Vacuum, Pressure Class, and Strain corrosion in
accordance with Appendix "A" of AWWA, C-950-01 or equivalent. The maximum calculated long term
deflection should not exceed 3%. Copies of the design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.

Stiffness: Minimum 5,000 N/m2. Suitability of stiffness shall be verified by Contractor for the
various trench and pipe laying conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Pressure class 6 kg/cm2 minimum or as shown on Drawings.

Longitudinal Strength: Conform to BS 5480 [11] table 2 or ASTM D3262 table 7.

Hoop strength shall be according to ASTM D3517 Table 8.

Strain corrosion resistance tests shall be carried out as per ASTM D 3681 or BS 5480 strain
corrosion value at 50 years to equal or exceed 0.7%.

Markings shall be to BS 5480 [11] clause 11.

Joints shall be GRP double socket couplings with rubber rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10].
The allowable angular deflection shall conform to the requirements of BS 5480 [11] Table
3.

D.10

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 39


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Testing on GRP Pipes: The following tests shall be carried out on manufactured pipes. Details of testing
program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to commencement of pipe
manufacture. The manufacturer quality control scheme shall be to BS 5750-8 [12] or ISO 9004. Guidance
on quality control and sampling shall be BS 5480 Appendix Q [11]. At least the following tests shall be
carried out and reported for approval.

 Visual inspection
 Longitudinal Strength : to ASTM D3262
 Hydraulic Test : to ASTM 3517 on every pipe.
 Stiffness : to ASTM D 2412 or BS 5480 [11]
 Wall Thickness : to BS 5480 [11]
 Diameter : to BS 5480 [11]
 Hardness : to ASTM 2583

 Loss of Ignition : to ASTM D 2584


 Hoop Tensile : to ASTM 3517

33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete pipes for Sewers and Culverts

E.1
Use Concrete pipes lined with HDPE for main sewer lines.

E.2
Concrete pipe shall be to BS 5911 or ASTM C14M-99 or DIN 4032 Class KW. Cement used in
manufacture shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 [3]

E.3
Joints shall be gasket type with flexible spigots and sockets. The shape of the joint must be designed to
prevent any movement of the gasket during assembly and as such produce full water-tightness. Rubber
gasket shall be to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10].

E.4 Factory Protection for Pipes:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 40


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Internally, pipes smaller than 900 mm diameter shall be coated with coal tar epoxy with 70% minimum
epoxy content. Coat minimum thickness shall be 1000 micron. Concrete pipes larger than 900 mm
diameter shall be internally lined with suitable HDPE sheeting. The thickness of the lining shall not be less
than 3 mm. Pipes shall be PE lined in the factory, and lining of the joints shall be made on site and then
the spark test and other relevant field tests shall be made. All defective and damaged surfaces shall be
repaired in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The lining shall be capable to
withstand safely the wastewater temperatures which could reach 45˚ C and shall form a watertight surface.

Externally two layers of bitumen to BS 3416 [4] or hot applied coal tar based material to BS 4164 [5] with
300 micron minimum dry film thickness.

E.5 Testing for Concrete Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on samples of concrete pipes delivered to site. The test report of
the third party inspector shall cover at least the following tests all as specified by adopted international
standards.

Visual inspection
Water absorption test
Hydrostatic
Crushing test, works proof test load and maximum test load
Tests for flexible joints
Deflection, straight draw, shear

33 05 41Vitrified Clay Pipes ( house connection or main pipes)

C.1
Use vitrified clay pipes for sewer networks
C.2
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall be to SASO 235/236-1995 or BS EN 295 [18] and shall be marked
accordingly.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 41


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C.3
Pipes and fittings shall be glazed and shall comply with BS 295-1 Clause 2 and in particular sub-clause
2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.9, 2.10 & 2.14.

C.4
Pipes and fittings shall be Class 160 for pipes ≤ 500mm diameter and Class 120 for pipes ≥ 600mm
diameter crusting strength per Class in KN/m2 as given in Table 5 of BS 295 part 1. Pipe may also be
classified as standard strength or extra strength.

C.5
Jointing material: sealing elements shall be polyurethane to Clauses 3.12 & 3.13.
C.6
Joints shall be water tight to Clauses 3.2 & 3.3 of EN 295.

C.7
Pipes shall be supplied with approved flexible and telescopic rubber ring joints which shall be capable of
withstanding the specified tests pressures applied both internally and externally

C.8
Junctions on clay pipe sewers shall be of similar material and suitable for use with flexibly jointed pipes

C.9
Before any length of pipe is laid, it shall be inspected and stood or slung vertically at the side of the trench
and “rung” with a wooden mallet. Any damaged or cracked pipe shall be rejected.

C.10
Tests on vitrified Clay Pipes

The following tests shall be carried out on vitrified clay pipes and products. The third party inspection
report shall cover the following quality control test all as per SASO 235-1995 or DIN 1230 or the
applicable standard specifications:

 Visual inspection
 Minimum bore

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 42


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

 Length
 Deviation from straightness
 Crushing strength
 Water tightness
 Polyurethane sealing elements
Angular deflection

33 31 00 .3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Bedding

A.1
Pipe bedding material shall be as specified in section 2.04.5 of Division 2 herein before

B. Pipe Laying and Jointing - Generally

B.1
The pipe shall be brought to grade and approved prior to the lowering of the pipe into the trench. Pipes
shall be laid to slopes shown on drawings.

B.2
Lowering of the pipe into the trench shall be carried out using ropes, wire slings, band slings, and
spreader beams etc. as recommended by manufacturer for each type of pipe and as approved.

B.3
All material shall be carefully examined for damage and tested in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions before laying to the satisfaction of Engineer.

B.4
The Contractor shall examine material to ensure internal coating or lining and outer coating or sheathing
is undamaged. If damaged, make good or dispose of as directed.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 43


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B.5
Pipe Cleanliness: The Contractor shall remove dirt and other materials before lowering and clear
construction debris from inside of pipe before making joint.

B.6
Pipe Placement: The Contractor shall lay pipes on even formations true to grade and line, with sockets (if
any) facing up the gradient.

B.7
Pipe on Solid Ground: The Contractor shall cut holes in bottom of trench to allow proper jointing and for
barrel of pipe to bear evenly on the bedding for its full length.

B.8
Pipe on Granular Bedding: The Contractor shall scoop out locally at sockets/couplings to enable pipe to
rest uniformly on barrel and adjust to exact line and level. After testing the Contractor shall lay and
compact further granular material in 150 mm layers or as approved to levels shown on the Drawings.

B.9
Pipe on Concrete Bed or Surround: The Contractor shall provide rectangular blocks of concrete Class
210/25, made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use, and hardwood folding wedges approved by
the Engineer and also provide two concrete blocks for each pipe, set and bone into correct level on
formation bottom and lay pipe properly centred and socketed. The Contractor shall insert two hardwood
folding wedges of width equal to width of concrete block between body of pipe and block and drive
together until pipe is brought to exact level required and leave blocks and wedges undisturbed while pipes
are being jointed and concrete bed and haunch or surround are being placed. The Contractor shall ensure
blocks and wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent settlement of pipe and leave sufficient
space to enable joints to be made, tested and inspected.

B.10

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 44


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Pipe Plugs: When pipe laying is not in progress, the Contractor shall close open ends of pipes with
properly fitted temporary wooden plugs or standard caps as directed.

B.11
Minimum cover over pipes is 1.5 m unless shown on drawings or instructed by the Engineer.

C. Jointing

C.1
Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed regarding placement of bedding and backfilling, cleanliness
of joint surfaces, lubricant used, correct location of components, provision of correct gaps between end of
spigot and back of socket for flexible joints etc.

C.2
Deflection of Joint: The Contractor shall not deflect flexible joints beyond 50 percent maximum
permissible angles given by manufacturer and/or relevant Standard.

C.3
Patent Detachable and Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall strictly comply with special instructions
issued by manufacturers of proprietary joints when laying and jointing.

C.4
Differing Pipe and Fitting Material: The Contractor shall joint with adaptors as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.

D. Line and Gradient

D.1
In Open Excavation: The Contractor shall provide and maintain sight rails and boning rods properly
painted to ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be positioned either vertically above the
lines of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto. At no time are there to be less than three sight rails in
position on each length of pipeline under construction to any one gradient.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 45


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D.2
Wherever possible and as per the Engineer instructions, the Contractor should use the suitable recent
surveying devices to adjust the line and gradient of pipelines.

D.3
In heading the Contractor shall provide and maintain marks to establish line and level of pipeline. Marks
shall be fixed in each working shaft and two further marks established in each length of heading.

E. Floatation

E.1
Prevention: Whenever water is excluded from interior of pipe the Contractor shall place sufficient backfill
above pipe to prevent floatation.

E.2
Removal of Pipe: The Contractor shall correct bedding and relay any pipe that has floated.

F. Pipe Built into Structures

F.1
Treatment of External Surface: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean outside surface of pipes to be built-
in immediately before installation and remove protective coating to metal pipes, where ordered. The
Contractor shall roughen clay and concrete pipes as directed and paint plastic pipes with appropriate
solvent cement and sprinkle with dry coarse sand whilst wet. The Contractor shall cut away sheathing
from sections to be built-in and after installation restore protection up to external face of structure with
approved bituminous material.

F.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 46


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Flexible Joints: The Contractor shall install two flexible joints or flexible patented joints adjacent to
structures and place the first joint not more than one pipe diameter from face of structure and second not
more than the following distances away from first:

 Pipelines not exceeding 450 mm: 2 pipe diameters


 Pipelines Over 450 mm and Not Exceeding 1000 mm: 1.2 m
 Pipelines Over 1000 mm: 1.8 m.
In general, the length of the short pieces may be selected as recommended by the pipe manufacture.

33 31 00 .4 PIPE WORK TESTING

A. Field Testing: Generally

A.1
Provision of Test Equipment: All items for test have to be provided on site before the test i.e pressure
gauges, instruments, water etc...

A.2
The Contractor shall carry out tests in the presence of the Engineer.

A.3
Fittings and Joints: The Contractor shall permanently anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints
exposed for checking.

A.4
Test Sections: The Contractor shall limit test sections to not more than 500 m.

A.5
Test Sections: The Contractor shall test pressure lines between valve chambers whenever possible.

A.6
Test Sections: The Contractor shall test gravity sewers in sections between manholes.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 47


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A.7
Test Sections: No testing shall be carried out against or through the pressure reducing valves. The setting
of the pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing purposes.

A.8
Closed Valve: The Contractor shall not test against a closed valve unless there is no acceptable
alternative.

A.9
The Contractor shall apply pressure by manually operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter
mains, by power driven test pump, if approved.
A.10
The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and repair visible leaks.

A.11
Failure: Should a test fail, the Contractor shall locate the leak and replace or make good defective pipe or
replace and make good faulty joint. The Contractor shall retest main.

A.12
Records: The Contractor shall keep test records in an approved form and hand original copy to the
Engineer immediately after completion of test.

B. Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Headers (Force Main)

B.1
Pressure Lines: The Contractor shall carry out hydrostatic test while pipeline is partially backfilled.

B.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 48


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the lowest point. After filling with water,
absorbent pipes shall be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before testing to allow for complete
absorption.

B.3
Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurizing shall then proceed until the specified test pressure is
reached in the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further quantities of entrapped air shall
be bled while the pressure is being raised.
B.4
Unless otherwise specified, the test pressure shall be equal to 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure of the pipeline as shown on the Drawings or as determined by the Engineer on Site, but shall
in no case exceed 75% of the factory hydrostatic test pressure.

B.5
The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by pumping using a separate test pump. Pumping
shall then be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line shall be re-pressurized to the
original test pressure and the volume of water pumped into the line recorded.

B.6
The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if visible leaks are detected (regardless of leakage
being within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of water pumped to restore original test
pressure after the period when pumping was stopped exceeds or 0.1 litre/day per km of pipe per mm
of pipe diameter for each 3 kg/ cm2 of applied pressure for other pipe material.

C. Hydrostatic Testing of Non-Pressure Pipelines

Non pressure lines shall be air tested for the whole pipeline after partial backfilling above the pipeline
except the connections then hydrostatic tested for the whole pipeline after complete backfilling and before
surface reinstatement and pavement.

Testing procedures should be as per BS 5886 and as per the following steps:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 49


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C.1
Procedure shall be as described for pressure pipelines.

C.2
Test Pressure: 1.25 m head of water above pipe soffit at highest point and not greater than 6 m head of
water at lowest point of section under test. If maximum head is exceeded, the Contractor shall test section
in stages.

C.3
Test period shall last 30 minutes.

C.4
Allowable Leakage: 0.125 litres/linear metre/metre diameter/30 minutes.

D. Hydraulic Individual Joint Test for Pipes Exceeding 1000 mm.

D.1
Procedure: The Contractor shall carry out procedures to BS 5886 [23], Type 2 testing after partial
backfilling, or equivalent. The Contractor shall pressurize joint to 2 bars and wait for 10 minutes at the end
of which repressure to 2 bars and again wait for 5 minutes. No pressure drop should be observed at the end
of the latter period.

D.2
Test Pressure: 2 bars

D.3
Test Period: 5 minutes.

D.4
Allowable Leakage or Pressure Drop: None

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 50


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E. Air Testing of Pipelines

E.1
The Contractor shall carry out tests to BS EN 752-2 [22] and plug length under test.

E.2
The Contractor shall apply pressure by approved method (ie. hand pump) until a pressure equivalent to
100 mm head of water is indicated on a U-tube connected to the system.

E.3
The Contractor shall allow 5 minutes for stabilization of air temperature and adjust pressure to 100 mm

E.4
Pressure Drop: Pressure shall not be allowed to fall by more than 25 mm in a period of 5 minutes.

E.5
Failure to pass the air test is not conclusive and if no leakage can be traced by external application of
soapy water to all sealing areas then a hydrostatic test shall be carried out before final rejection.

F. Visual Inspection Test

F.1
Timing: The Contractor shall carry out test after total backfilling of length under test.

F.2
Limit of length to be tested at one time is three full- length pipes unless otherwise approved.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 51


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F.3
Apparatus: The Contractor shall use rubber tyred bogies that do not damage lining of pipe and an adequate
supply of electric lamps.

F.4
The Contractor shall check joints by means of feelers to ensure rubber rings are correctly located.

F.5
The Contractor shall check pipe barrel for visible cracks.

G. Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes

G.1
The Contractor shall conduct deflection tests for GRP pipes as required by the Engineer at 3 stages.
Deflection shall be measured at the spigot end at mid point and at socket end.

 Stage 1: At completion of primary backfill (deflection at this stage should be below


0.5%).
 Stage 2: At final backfill (Maximum allowable deflection 2.5%).
 Stage 3: Six months after final backfill (maximum allowable deflection 4.0%).

G.2
Pipes not passing the deflection tests at stage 2 or stage 3 shall be removed and replaced.

H. Testing of Water Retaining Structures

H.1
All water retaining structures such as reservoirs, tanks, basins ponds, regardless of the construction
material, lining or final surface treatment shall be tested or Water-tightness.

H.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 52


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Tightness testing shall be carried out according to ACI 350.1-01/350.1R-01.

H.3
Allowable losses of water, after correction for evaporation, precipitation etc. shall be as set in the
table below:

Type of structure Test and Criteria*


Tanks/Reservoirs/Channels/Conduits for sewer, HST-VIO & HST-NML
Concrete pipes, Open or covered (Stormwater
Channels not included)
Settling tanks/Basins HST-VIO & HST-NML

* For designations refer to ACI 350.1 - 01/350.1 R-01.

H.4
Notwithstanding satisfactory completion of the water absorption test, any leakage visible on the
outside faces of the structure shall be stopped. Any caulking or making good of cracks in the wall
section shall, where practicable, be carried out from the inside face, and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

H.5
Upon completion of the test, the Contractor shall empty the structure, dispose of the contents and
shall clean the structure and any equipment therein of all deposits left by the water.

I. Field Protection and Coating

I.1
Iron Pipes: Polyethylene sleeving shall be to ANSI/AWWA C105, Section 4.1 or ISO 8180 or in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Sleeving shall be heavy duty blue color polyethylene with
a minimum thickness of 225 microns.

I.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 53


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Patented Detachable and Flexible Joints and Flanged Connections: The Contractor shall protect metal
joints with mastic compound and protective tape in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Minimum overlap shall be 55% and the Contractor shall press out firmly all folds and irregularities.

J. Cleaning and Inspection of Sewers

J.1
Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean pipeline of silt and debris after backfilling pipe trenches and
completing manholes, hatch boxes etc. but before surfaces are permanently reinstated and make ready for
inspection by the Engineer.

J.2
Inspection: Pipelines of 700 mm diameter and over are, where practicable, shall be inspected from the
inside and when necessary a suitable trolley is to be provided for this purpose.

J.3
Inspection: Pipelines less than 700 mm diameter and larger pipelines which cannot be inspected from the
inside, are to be inspected by passing a cylinder of diameter 25 mm less than the internal diameter of the
pipe and length not less than the internal diameter of the pipe through each pipeline.

K. Waterproofing of Structures

K.1
Waterproofing of water retaining structures shall not be commenced until tested for water-tightness
and found satisfactory.
K.2
The waterproofing compound shall penetrate and react with the concrete to form crystals that seal all
capillaries, tracts and shrinkage cracks in the concrete structure. The compound shall consist of a
mixture of chemicals, quartz, sand and cement supplied in powder form ready to mix with water.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 54


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Application shall be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as
approved by the Engineer.

Section 33 14 19 VALVES

1 - GENERAL

A. Scope

A.1 these works shall consist of furnishing all materials, constructing, installing and completing in all
respects of works described in this Specification and indicated on the Drawings.

2- VALVES

33 14 19.1 Gate Valves Cast Iron

A.1 Type:
To all diameters and shall be of ductile cast iron (GGG 40) to DIN3202 or equivalent and operation
system shall be of non corrosive cast iron and shall be non rising and gate of copper or cast iron covered
with rubber.

A.2
Socket (DIN 8061, DIN 8062, ISO 3606, ISO 4422) or equivalent with flanges to (DIN 3202, F4 or
equivalent).

A.3
Material of flanged valve and socket:

Valve body from ductile cast iron to (GGG40) (EN-JS 1030)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 55


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Gate of the type covered with rubber.

Valve stem of stainless steel and shall be of non rising type, and valve shall be operated manually
or with a stem.

A.4
Testing: valves shall be tested to DIN 3230 Part 4 – EN 12266 or equivalent.

A.5
Operation: Either manually or operation key with a rising stem relative to depth of installation. It may
need an internal disk and shall be as Engineers direction and manufacturers regulations.

A.6
Protection: Casting surfaces internally and externally with epoxy at a thickness not less than 250 microns
as per specifications.

33 14 19.2 Butterfly Valves (Not Used)

B.1 Type:
To BS EN 593, double flange for NP 10/16 bar or equivalent.

B.2 Component Parts:

Butterfly valve with the fixed plate not connection with the stem.

Valve body and plate of ductile cast iron (GGG 40)

Valve length as per German Specifications: (DN 3202 F4) series 14 & EN558-1 or equivalent.

Valve stem of anti corrosive cast iron

Flanges to DIN 2501 or equivalent.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 56


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Opening & closing of valve shall be done by gearbox mounted on valve.

B.3 Protection:
Casting surfaces internally and externally with epoxy at a thickness not less than 250 microns as per
specifications.

33 14 19.3 Check Valves for Sewer Lines

C.1
Check valves shall be to BS EN 12334 [28], swing, straight, for horizontal use and suitable for working
pressure of 16 bars.

C.2
Material of Component Parts: Ductile iron from basic materials listed in BS EN 12334 [28] Table 5, under
'copper alloy faced' column.

C.3
Special Requirements: Seating or facing rings are to be renewable. An arrow showing direction of flow is
to be visible from outside and cast integral with the valve housing.

C.4
End Connections: Either flanged to BS 4504 [2], or screw ended to BS 21 [26] to suit joints specified for
adjoining pipes.

C.5
Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be given an initial coat of protective paint immediately after
shot blasting and a second coat on assembly. Protective coating is to be hot applied coal tar or bitumen to
BS 4164 [5] or BS 3416 [4] respectively. Minimum thickness of coating shall be 250 microns.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 57


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

33 14 19.4 Flap Valves

D.1 Type:
To be flange mounted, designed for use on end closures to prevent entrance of backwater. Seating plane
is to have 10 deg. inclination.

D.2 Materials:
Cast iron body and cover, bronze seat faces, bronze hinge pins and spring pins, cast iron follow ring and
plated steel ring draw bolts. Materials subject to de- zincification or de-aluminuzation are not to be used.

D.3
End Connections: If flange mounted, flanges are to be to DIN 2501 or equivalent.

D.4
Protection by epoxy with a thickness not less than 250 microns as per specifications.

33 14 19.6 Air Valves for Pressurized Sewage Mains

E.1
Generally: Valves are to have cast iron body, cover and baffle to BS EN 1561 [29], Grade 14, stainless
steel float and float guide, Buna-N seat or needle and Dirlin internal linkages. Air valves are to have long
float stem and body to keep valve operating mechanism free from contact with sewage by maintaining an
air gap between mechanism and waste media. Float is to hang freely in centre of valve body with 12 mm
clearance all around to prevent large solids getting above the float. Valves are to be fitted with blow off
valves, quick disconnect couplings and minimum 2.0 m of hose to permit backflushing without
dismantling valve. Valves are to be factory tested to 1.5 times working pressure and factory coated with
bituminous coating to BS 4164 [5] or BS 3416 [4] respectively. Thickness of coat shall be 10 mils.

E.2

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 58


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Single Air Valves: Type I (or air vacuum valve) for releasing or admitting air during filling or emptying of
pipes. Type II (or air release valve) for automatically releasing, under pressure, accumulated air at
summits of mains. Air valves 50 mm and smaller are to have screwed inlet to B.S.P. thread with gunmetal
male screwed stop valve. Air valves larger than 50 mm are to be flanged to BS 4504 [2] or DIN 2501 or
equivalent and have nitrite rubber lined butterfly valve with nylon coated disc on stainless steel shaft
operated by lever handle with indicator and locking thumb screw. Valves are to be suitable for working
pressures up to NP16.

E.3
Double Air Valves (or Combination Air Valves): These are required for relieving air under pressure and
in bulk, are to be an assembly of an air vacuum and an air release valve. Valves shall be suitable for
working pressures up to NP16.

33 31 19 Sanitary Sewage Gravity Service Piping

A. Work includes providing and installation of pipes from the manhole or the sewer inlet to the
collector outlet and the property border as shown on drawings. This includes all the components
and requirements.

B. Material of sewer house connection pipes shall be vitrified clay as per section 4.3.1 of this
document or uPVC as per section C and of diameters 100 to 200 mm according to drawings and Bill of
Quantities. Piping from inspection chamber to property shall be same as that used by owner.

33 05 31.11 Polyvinyl Chloride Gravity Sewer pipes (UPVC) (house connection or main pipes)

C.1
Pipes shall conform to Saudi Standards SASO 14 or DIN 8061 / 8062 with 10 bars working pressure or
Class (4) as indicated on the Drawings or the Bill of Quantities. Concrete encasement shall be added to
pipes with covers less than 1.0m or more than 5.0m.

C.2
Fittings and joints shall comply with ISO 4422 or BS EN 1452 [9] Part 3 or DIN 8063 or equivalent and
manufactured from same material of pipe.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 59


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C.3
Joints shall be to DIN 8063 part 1, socket spigot with rubber sealing rings shall be to BS EN 681-2 [10].

C.4
The following test shall be carried out on samples from every batch of PVC pipes delivered to site. The
report of the third party inspector shall cover at least the following tests as requested by DIN 8061/8062:

Visual inspection
Pipe diameter / roundness
Wall thickness
Hydrostatic test
Stress resistance tests
Impact test
Elevated temperature cycling test
Resistance to sulfuric acid

C.5
Pipes and fittings shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun at all times by means of reflective
cover sheets.

D. Connection locations shall be as per drawings and as per Engineers and as per Engineers directions
during execution and number and diameters that shall be constructed as per drawings and Bill of
Quantities.

E. House connection construction: the Contractor shall clean site and trenches and refill and lay pipes and
put bedding for pipes and paving to specifications as in the main network.

F. Records: the Contractor shall keep accurate records for house connections locations showing diameter
length and location. Records shall be in specified formats and shall be ready for revision. These records
shall be submitted to the Client when work finish. The Contractor shall show this information on graphs

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 60


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

in coordination with the Engineer also securing three copies to be submitted to the Client and as shown in
4-4-7 of this specifications.

33 31 00 .5 JOINTING MATERIALS AND ADAPTORS

A. Generally

A.1 Gaskets:
Elastomeric full face 3 mm thick joint rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10] with dimensions to BS
3063 [38].

A.2 Rings:
Elastomeric to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2 [10] with dimensions to manufacturer's recommendations to
suit type of joint required.

A.3 Bolts and Nuts:


ISO metric black hexagon to BS 4190 [39], minimum tensile strength 433 MN/m2, maximum elongation
17%. After fixing, bolt projection shall to be maximum 6 mm, minimum 3 mm.

A.4 Washers:
Black steel shall be to BS 4320 [40] or ISO/R 887.
A.5
Dielectric joints shall have insulating gasket between flanges and Teflon sleeves and washers between
bolts and nuts and flanges. Joints are to be suitable for operating pressure of system.

A.6
Saddle connections should meet the following requirements:

- Saddle diameter should be less than sewer line diameter.

- Drilling should be done correctly to avoid any crack / damage to existing line and to use
proper drilling machine/core.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 61


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

- Concrete surround the branches to protect from impacts

- Branch piece should not project into the main sewer.

B. Flexible Couplings

B.1 Type:
Gasket sleeved type, to allow angular deflection and axial movement of two joined pipe ends and to
maintain permanent, leak-tight joint.

B.2
Components comprise one centre sleeve, two end followers or flanges, two rubber-compounded wedge-
section gaskets and sufficient draw bolts and nuts to properly compress gaskets. Tightening of bolts to
draw end followers together is to compress gaskets in recess between centre sleeve and followers onto
pipe ends to effect positive seal.

B.3
Size: Couplings are to have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type of joined pipe ends.
Centre sleeve is to be of adequate thickness and whole coupling suitable for minimum working pressures
shown on the Drawings.

B.4
Centre Sleeve and Followers shall be true circular sections, free from irregularities, flat spots or surface
defects and formed from steel mill sections with space between sleeve and follower designed to provide
confinement of gasket.

B.5
Bolts shall be special steel having minimum yield strength of 2800 kg/cm2 (40,000 psi) and ultimate
strength of 4200 kg/cm2 (60,000 psi). Bolts shall be track-head design to prevent turning when nut is
drawn up and threads are to be rolled with a nominal diameter larger than diameter of shank. Manufacturer
shall supply information regarding recommended torque to which bolts are to be tightened.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 62


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

B.6
Gaskets shall be synthetic rubber-base compound with other products to produce material which will not
deteriorate from age, heat or exposure to air and which is resilient and able to resist cold flow of material
so that joint will remain sealed and tight indefinitely when subjected to shock, vibration, pulsation,
temperature and adjustment of connected pipes.

B.7
Factory Protection: Coupling shall be factory painted internally with 10 mils coating of epoxy and
externally with red primer to AWWA 203 Type B chlorinated rubber solution compatible with bitumen,
coal tar and general paints.

B.8
Installation: Couplings are to be assembled on site in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
ensure permanently tight joints under all conditions of expansion, contraction, shifting and settlement.

C. Dismantling Couplings

C.1 Type:
These shall ensure extensible connection between sections of pipework, to be mounted next to valves to
enable easy dismantling from pipework or to permit joining pipework when butterfly valve is removed for
maintenance.

C.2 Components:
Dismantling piece shall be flanged type composed of two parts, one sliding into the other, and a free
flange to compress a trapezoidal section seal to ensure water tightness. Coupling shall have locking
devices to provide elements of complete rigidity.

C.3 Construction:
All steel with flanges class PN 10, PN 16 or PN 25 depending upon coupling location on pipework.

C.4 Size:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 63


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Couplings shall have diameter specifically supplied for and to properly fit type of joined ends of pipes and
valves. Coupling shall permit tightening of end flanges without risk of misalignment. Seal shall be locked
after end joints are tightened.

D. Flanged Adaptor: Ferrous

D.1 Material:
Cast iron to BS EN 545 [1].

D.2
Length of adaptor shall be 200 mm for diameters up to 150 mm, 250 mm for diameters between 200 and
300 mm and as approved for diameters larger than 300 mm.

D.3
Factory Protection: Coated with bitumen or coal tar to BS 3416 [4] or 4164 [5] respectively.

33 31 00 .6 VALVE ACCESSORIES

Hand-wheels shall be to BS 5163 [25], of cast iron to BS EN 1561 [29]. Hand-wheels are to be marked
'CLOSE' with an arrow to indicate clockwise direction of closure. Diameters and other constructional
details shall be to manufacturer's standards. Hand-wheels are to be supplied at a rate of 1 in 5 valves.

33 31 00 .7 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. Generally

A.1
Prior to Installation, the Contractor shall inspect for cleanliness of bores, seating surfaces etc. and for
handling damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of pressure-containing bolting.
A.2
The Contractor shall ensure gates and hydrants are in closed position before installation.

A.3
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 64
SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Operate hydrants through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which they are to be
installed to ensure proper functioning.

B. Installation of Valves

B.1
Prior to installation, valves shall be inspected for cleanliness of bore, seating surfaces etc. and for
handling damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of bolting. Valves shall be in close position
before installation.

B.2
Valves shall be operated through one complete opening and closing cycle in the position in which
they are to be installed to ensure proper functioning.

B.3
Valves shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner specified for laying and jointing pipe and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Each valve shall be provided with a concrete
pad as shown on the Drawings so that the pipe does not support the weight of the valve. Valves shall
not be used to spring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation.

B.4
Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm footing to prevent settling and excessive strain on
connection to pipe.

B.5
All stressed bolts (bonnet, seal plate and end connections) shall be inspected for adequate tightness
after installation and prior to field testing.

B.6

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 65


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Valves shall be protected against action of external agents by a coat of approved bituminous
compound, applied cold by hand brushing after pressure tests on pipelines have been completed.
Buried bolts etc., shall be protected against corrosion, with approved paint or polyethylene wrapping.

C. Sewer Building Connections

C.1
Location: The Contractor shall agree location and invert level of connections with the Engineer before
starting construction.

C.2
The Contractor shall programme connections to follow closely construction of sewer.

C.3
Execution: Connection to sewer shall be at manhole, where possible, and add flexible joint when
connecting at manholes without any additional payment connection can be done by Y junction.

C.4
Minimum Grade: The Contractor shall lay connections at minimum grade of 20 per 1000 unless otherwise
approved.

C.5
The Contractor shall install, bed and test connections in same manner as main sewers.

C.6
For empty lots on those under construction, house connections should be also added for future
connection.

5.04.7 RECORDS

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 66


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The Contractor shall maintain accurate records details for the whole project components and show details
for the following works, these records should be submitted in both hardcopy and digital forms, three
copies for each form. Digital data and drawings should be prepared in compliance with geographic
information system (GIS) and digital mapping in the directorate (if any).

A. As-built house connection plan:

This record showing the sketch of the particular section indicating the downstream MH & Upstream MH.
Downstream MH usually shown on the lower portion of the record sheet, thus, a reader is facing Upstream
of the section. Listed below is the information required for this record;

When house connection/s are constructed in a section

- Mainline number
- Mainline section number
- Length of mainline pipe
- Mainline pipe Ө and type of pipe
- Invert level of Upstream MH
- Invert level of Downstream MH
- Connection number & position (numbering will be designated in chronological order while
positioning for left or right derived when facing upstream of the section)
- Type of connection (deep connection; shallow connection; backdrop connection to MH; shallow
connection to MH)
- House connection pipe diameter
- Distance from Downstream MH
- Distance from centerline of sewer to end lateral (end lateral could be a inspection chamber “I.C.”,
a clean-out “C.O” or a end plug “EP” for future connections)
- Invert of street sewer
- Invert of end lateral
- Number of I.C. or C.O.
- A column of remarks must be provided for future up-dating of house connection/s

B. As-built House Connection Profile

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 67


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

This record shows the profile information of each house connection/s constructed in a section installed
“Y” junctions on the mainline for future house connection requires no profile record.
A sketch is to be shown for the particular house connection with complete information as listed below;

- Mainline number
- Mainline section number
- Mainline Pipe Ө and type of pipe
- House connection number & position
- Distance from Downstream manhole
- Type of connection
- House connection pipe Ө and type of pipe
- House connection slope
- Lengths:
- From centerline of mainline to property wall/limit
- From centerline of end lateral to property wall/limit
- Length where pipe slope is derived
- Elevations:
- Ground elevation at end lateral
- Ground elevation at mainline
- Invert elevation of mainline
- Outlet Invert elevations

C. Mainline Records

There are three (3) important records to be maintained from constructed mainlines, these are the general
lay-out and bench mark, site plan and the line profiles. Description of these records are as follows;

C.1 For general layout & bench mark

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 68


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film covering the whole area of work executed by the
contractor with an “appropriate” scale that will accommodate on drawing sheet. Required informations are
as follows:

- Line numbers
- Manhole numbers
- Name of street
- Name of important landmark in the area (i.e mosque, school, garden, hospital, clinic, shopping
mall, government offices, etc…)
- Location of bench marks with there designated numbers and elevations
- A separate table is to be allocated describing the complete bench marks used in the project.

C.2 For Site Plans

This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000 showing in segments for
the entire area of work executed by the Contractor. Required informations are as follows;
- Line numbers
- Manhole numbers
- Coordinates for each and every manholes
- Lateral distance location for each and every manhole
(i.e. distance from center of manhole to property wall or sidewalk curb stone or street light post or
fire hydrant traffic light post or any favorable base of measurement)
- Properties of sections (pipe diameter & type of pipe, length & slope)

- Elevations:

- Ground level of manholes


- Invert level of manholes
- Invert levels of incoming pipes in the manhole but only if there is drop in invert from
manhole

- Name of street
- Name of important landmark in the area (i.e. mosque, school, garden, hospital, clinic, shopping
mall, government offices, etc…)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 69


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

C.3 For Line Profiles

This drawing must be prepared in A-0 size drafting film with a scale of 1:1,000 horizontal and 1:100
vertical for the entire mainlines constructed in the whole area of work by the Contractor. Required
information is as follows:

- Line number
- Surface condition
- Ground level
- Invert level
- Depth-to-invert
- Distance
- Chainage
- Pipe data (pipe diameter & type of pipe, slope and bedding)
- Rock levels

- Underground utilities crossing either below or over the mainline pipes

- Type of utility
- Description
- Top elevation

- Incoming line in the manhole

- Line number
- Pipe invert level
- Pipe diameter & type of pipe

33 31 00 .8 BEDDING, SURROUND, HAUNCHING, ENCASEMENT


AND THRUST BLOCKS

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 70


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

1 GENERAL

A. Scope

A.1 Pipe bedding, surround and ways of securing pipe installations are specified in this Section.

2 MATERIALS

A. Pipe bedding and/or surround, and filling materials under and around pipes shall comply with the
appropriate requirements of Section 2.04.

B. All concrete work shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 5.

C. Concrete bedding shall be Class 110/25.

D. Concrete for encasements, thrust blocks, arches and haunches shall be Class 250/20.

E. Compressible board shall be 20 mm thick fibrous material or similar approved material.

3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Placing Concrete

A.1
After placing pipe the Contractor shall pour concrete in trench and thoroughly work under pipe to provide
solid and uniform bedding.

A.2
After pipe joint is completed the Contractor shall place the balance of concrete or haunching and work into
place on both sides simultaneously.

A.3

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 71


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

The Contractor shall form vertical construction joints in concrete beds, surrounds etc. at the face of pipe
joints with compressible board and finish to profile of the concrete and pipe. The Contractor shall fill any
gap between spigot and socket with approved resilient material.

B. Placing Material Other than Concrete

B.1
The Contractor shall place surround or bedding material in bottom of prepared trench and carefully hand
tamp to minimum thicknesses.

B.2
After pipe has been laid the Contractor shall place additional material or haunching in successive layers
not exceeding 150 mm thick on both sides simultaneously and completely fill spaces between pipe and
side of trench and carefully hand tamp without disturbing the pipe.

C. Thrust Blocks

C.1
Thrust blocks shall be provided at bends and other fittings on pressure pipelines. Additional excavation
shall be made as required after pipeline has been jointed. No pressure is to be applied to the thrust block
until concrete has matured for at least 3 days.

33 31 00 .9 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS

1 GENERAL

A. Scope

A.1 This section specifies works related to:

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 72


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Sewage manholes and Inspection Chambers.

Valve chambers for sewer force mains.

2 MATERIALS

A. Excavation and backfilling generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Divisions
2 & 3 of the Specification.

B. Concrete work generally shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Division 6 of the
Specification.

C. Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as specified in Section 6.03 "Steel


Reinforcement and Fixing".

D. Precast units to BS 5911 [13] Part 200 or ASTM C478. Except for thickness which shall be as
indicated on the Drawings. Concrete shall be Class 250/20. Cement shall be ordinary Portland
cement to BS EN 197 [3].

E. Plain and reinforced concrete for cast In-Situ units shall be Class 210/25 and 250/25 respectively.
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197 [3].

F. Coatings shall be as specified in A5 and A6 of section 3.06.3. Alternative internal coating is given
in Section 3.06.4.

G. Covers and frames as per Ministry of Transport specification and shall comply with BS EN 124 or
ISO 1083 or DIN 1229 or equivalent. Wording on cover shall indicate nature of network
(Sewerage – ‫ )ﺻﺮﻑ ﺻﺤﻲ‬as required by Employer. Grades shall be as follows:

 In Roadways: Cast Iron Heavy duty test load 40 tons.


 In Sidewalks, Carriage Drive and Cycle Tracks: Cast Iron or GRP Medium duty test load
25 tons.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 73


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

 In Footpaths: Cast Iron or GRP Light duty, test load 7 tons.

H. Manhole covers shall be of circular pattern with 600 mm diameter unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings. Frames shall be provided with opening for fixing bolts which ensure solid frame
embedment into manhole concrete neck. Covers and frames shall be coated with two layers coal
tar epoxy (70% epoxy, 30% coal tar) to BS 3416 [4]. Minimum thickness 250 microns.

I. Step irons shall be mild steel to BS 4211 [51], galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52] with 200
grams of zinc per square meter and covered with two layers of polyethylene (PE) or
polypropylene.

J. Safety chains shall be 12 mm diameter wrought iron short link chain, galvanized to BS EN ISO

1461 [52] with 200 grams of zinc per square meter.

K. Guard railing shall be tubular, mild steel, medium grade to BS 1387 [15] with welded joints,
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 [52] with 200 grams of zinc per square meter.

L. Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular purpose and use and to approval. When used
to fix galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and fixing bolts and nuts cut to pre-plating
limits and electroplated with zinc to BS EN 12329 [53].

M. Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength castings and shall conform to AASHTO M103
(ASTM A27). Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, castings
shall be grade 65-35 fully annealed. Steel castings shall conform to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings. Test bars shall be prepared and tested as specified in AASHTO M103.

N. Wrought iron plates and shapes shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. Rolled
wrought iron bars and shapes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A207. Wrought iron
plates shall conform to ASTM A42.

O. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all specified test coupons and Manufacturers'
Certificates of Guarantee for all structural steel, cast iron, cast steel and wrought iron parts stating
that the materials supplied meet the appropriate AASHTO or ASTM specification. The

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 74


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

submission of such test certificates shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out
independent tests at an approved laboratory, as directed by the Engineer, at his own expense.

5.06.3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. Manholes and Inspection Chambers


A.1
Construction: In-situ concrete or precast concrete as indicated on Drawings or as proposed by Contractor
as per the site requirements but the distance between two consecutive manholes should not exceed 100 m,

the minimum distance will be according to site situation and as directed by the Engineer. In-situ units shall
comply with the provisions of Division 6 for concrete works of this specifications.

A.2
Precast units shall be cast in steel watertight forms at least 3 weeks before sections are used. Lowest unit
shall be bedded on in situ concrete base and bed and haunch in cement mortar. Joints of units shall be
liberally coated with approved bituminous material of trowelling grade prior to fixing. Joints shall be
filled solid and neatly striked off surplus compound. Work shall remain undisturbed for 7 days thereafter.
Alternatively joints may be sealed with approved preformed jointing strip in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. The precast concrete cover slab shall be bedded in cement mortar on the top
unit.

A.3
Channels in bottom of manhole shall be smooth, semi-circular and sized equal to diameter of adjacent
sewers. For straight through manholes, channels of half pipe sections shall be installed. Changes in
direction of flow shall be made with smooth curves as large as manholes permit. Changes in size and
grade of channels shall be gradual and even.

A.4
Benching shall be formed with sulphate resisting concrete Class 250/20 to rise vertically from top of
channels to a height not less than soffit of outlet pipe, then it shall be sloped upwards 1 in 10 to walls.
Floating shall then be carried out within 3 hours with a coat of sulphate resisting cement-sand mortar 1:2.
Smooth finishing shall then be accomplished with a steel trowel.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 75


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

A.5
Manholes and chambers shall be coated externally with three layers of asphaltic composition that shall be
applied by brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 600 microns.

A.6
Internal faces of chambers shall be coated with four coats of coal tar epoxy paint, 70% epoxy and 30%
coal tar. The coating shall be applied by brush in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minimum
thickness shall be 1000 microns.
A.7
Internal faces of manholes shall be coated with GRP or HDPE and base surfaces of manholes shall be
covered with epoxy mortar.

A.8
Step irons shall be cast into precast units or grouted into preformed mortices. Step irons shall not be used
as lifting eyes. Devices for lifting and handling are to be provided on exterior faces.

A.9
Adjustment of level shall be accomplished with concrete rings after completion of surrounding levels.
Final levels shall be even and accurate.

A.10
Fames for covers and gratings shall be solidly bedded in mortar and fixed firmly using fixing bolts.
Position centrally over opening and level and square with surrounding finishes. Set cover in position to
prevent twisting.

A.11
The Contractor shall test manholes as follows:
 Plug manhole inlets and outlets.

 Fill manhole with water and allow to stand for at least 24 hours or such longer period to
allow for complete absorption.

 Re-top with water.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 76


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

 Allowable leakage over 24 hours shall not to exceed 1% of total volume of manhole,
otherwise necessary repair and re-testing shall be carried to achieve the required results.

B. Drop Manholes

B.1
For drops greater than 600 mm between the invert of pipe entering the manhole and crown of pipe exiting
the manhole, drop manholes shall be used. Pipes and connections of the drop structure shall be wrapped
with concrete Class “A” as shown in drawings.

C. Valve Chambers (on Force Mains)

C.1
Construction shall be in situ concrete, precast concrete or blockwork as indicated on the Drawings.

C.2
When masonry is used in lieu of concrete for square or rectangular structures, the inside dimensions of
the structure shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings unless ordered otherwise by the Engineer.
The mortar for masonry shall be as specified in Section 5.01 "Concrete and Concrete Mixes and Testing ".
The brick or concrete block shall be laid with full mortared joints and with sufficient header courses to tie
the masonry together properly as approved by the Engineer.

C.3
External coating shall consist of two coats of asphaltic composition applied by brush in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 400 microns.

C.4
The covers frame shall be set as per clause B.2 above.

D. Inlets and Gullies

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 77


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D.1
Construction shall be in situ concrete, precast concrete or blockwork as indicated on the Drawings

D.2
When masonry is used in lieu of concrete for square or rectangular structures. This will be as per clause
B.2 above.

D.3
Castings shall be set in full mortar beds or otherwise secured as shown on the Drawings and approved by
the Engineer. Mortar for setting castings shall be mixed as specified in Section 5.01 "Concrete and
Concrete Mixes and Testing". Castings shall be set accurately to correct elevation so that no subsequent
adjustment is necessary

E. Cleaning

E.1
All chambers, catch basins, catch pits, manholes, inlets and outlets shall be thoroughly cleaned of any
accumulations of silt, debris or foreign matter of any kind, and shall be free from such accumulations at
the time of final inspection.

F. Coating

F.1
Structural steel cover plates shall be coated with two coats of coal tar epoxy 250 microns dry film
thickness.

G. GRP Lining for Internal Surfaces of Manholes and Chambers:

G.1
GRP lined manholes and chambers shall be used in case of high aggressive soil and for high sulphate
acids, and shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings and shall incorporate a GRP lining at least
7 mm thick to all internal faces.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 78


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

G.2
Benchings and channels shall be preformed, inverted and filled with concrete. Alternatively, the GRP
lining may be applied in situ after constructing the benching.

G.3
GRP lining to walls shall consist of a preformed tube of a white (or near white) colour, incorporating lugs
moulded onto the outside face at 500 mm centres to allow bonding to the concrete surround. The lining
shall have adequate strength to withstand handing, and shall not buckle or distort during pouring of the
concrete surround. Internal bracing may be used during pouring to maintain circularity and verticality.

G.4
Precast cover slabs shall incorporate a preformed flat sheet of white (or near white) GRP on the soffit,
bonded to a circular GRP tube to form the access opening. Both linings shall incorporate lugs molded onto
the surface to allow bonding to the concrete.

G.5
The overall size of the lining to the soffit of the slab shall be 150 mm greater than the internal diameter of
the manhole onto which the slab is to be placed.

G.6
In all cases, the outer surface of the GRP, exposed to sewage/sewer atmosphere, shall consist of a
chemically resistant layer comprising vinyl ester resin suitably reinforced with a “C” glass or synthetic
tissue veil. This layer shall be no less than 2 mm thick, and shall have a resin content by weight of
approximately 90% at the exposed surface, reducing to 65%-75% at the inner surface. The remainder of
the

liner shall consist of vinyl ester or isophthalic resins and “E” or “ECR” glass chopped strand mat.

G.7
Joints in the lining tubes shall not normally be permitted.

G.8
Joints between preformed GRP benchings and lining tubes shall be made using an external sleeve 200
mm long bonded onto both units, and then bandaged using suitable resin and chopped strand mat. Such

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 79


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

bandaging shall extend 75 mm either side of the edge of the sleeve. On the inside face of the manhole, the
joint between the benching and liner tube shall be filled with vinyl ester paste to produce a smooth finish.

G.9
If GRP linings to benching are to be formed in situ, the surface of the wall lining tube shall be lightly
abraded over a height of 150 mm from benching level. A fillet of 50 mm radius shall than be formed of
vinyl ester paste at the junction of benching and wall. The GRP lining to the channels and benchings shall
then be built up by applying isophthalic or vinyl ester resin to the whole of the benching, fillet and abraded
wall lining. A layer of “E” or “ECR” mat shall then be rolled into the resin using a suitable steel roller to
exclude all air and provide complete immersion of the glass fibre in the resin.

G.10
After a period to allow pre-gel to get to a tacky state, a second coat of resin shall be applied followed by a
further layer of glass fibre mat. This process shall be repeated until the total thickness of lining is
approximately 4 mm. Vinyl ester resin and “C” glass or synthetic tissue veil shall then be used to complete
the lining.

G.11
Top surface of benching shall incorporate silica sand to form a non-slip surface.
G.12
The precast cover slab shall be seated on the walls using sand/cement mortar. The joint shall be raked out
15 mm deep on the inside face and pointed with an approved pitch extended polyurethane sealant.

G.13
GRP ladders of an approved pattern as specified may be purpose made to suit the depth of each manhole
and chamber. Fixings for ladders shall be approved stainless steel stud anchors. Fixings holes shall be
grouted with epoxy mortar and sealed as above. Rungs or treads shall be ribbed to provide a non-slip
surface.

G.14
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a 7 year unconditional guarantee against failure of all GRP
linings whether caused by defective materials or workmanship. The guarantee shall be valid from the date
of completion of the installation and must be handed to the Engineer before the issue of the Certificate of
Completion.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 80


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

G.15
GRP sealing plates shall be provided to all sewage manhole chambers, sump and holding tanks access
covers. The sealing plates shall be capable of adequately withstanding 10% sulphuric acid at 50 deg.C
(122 deg. F) for a period of 100 days and shall be a minimum of [] mm thick and shall be designed to
withstand a loading of 7.5 kN/m².

The sealing plates shall be in the form of a plug with a flange to accommodate restraining bolts and to
prevent the plate passing into the manhole. The plates shall incorporate a synthetic rubber (neoprene or
similar approve) sealing ring integrally fixed to the GRP plate to produce a gas and sand tight joint
between it and a specially profiled frame edge without the use of restraining bolts. Two GRP lifting
handles shall be provided securely laminated to the plate. The underside of the plate shall have a resin rich
finish and there shall be no exposed fibres. Cut and/or drilled faces shall be sealed with resin. The resins
and glass used in the fabrication of the plates shall be generally as specified for GRP pipes.

H. HDPE Lining for Manholes

The internal surfaces of manholes shall be properly protected against the corrosive and aggressive effects
of the wastewater on the long term. All concrete surfaces shall be internally lined with suitable HDPE
sheeting structured in the form of T lock, spiked, sure grip or equivalent as approved and in accordance
with the manufacturer recommendations. Liners should be welded in a circular form and introduced during
the production of pipes. Liner thickness shall be 3 mm.

H.1 Physical characteristics of HDPE liners

 Density 0.94 g/cm3


 Temperature resistance up to 80˚C
 Friction equivalent to manning 0.013
 Water Absorption DIN 53495 – 0.25%
 Elongation at Yield DIN 53455/6/4 - 17%
 Elongation at Break DIN 53455/6/4 - min 400%

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 81


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

 Tensile Strength at Yield DIN 53455/6/4 - min 15 N/mm2


 Puncture Resistance DIN 16726 - 2000 mm
 Melt Flow rate/ index 190/5 ISO 1133
 Heat reversion 100°C/hr ASTM D1204 ≤ 1%

H.2 Chemical Properties

Unaffected by continuous exposure to dilute solutions of acids, alkaline chemicals, corrosive salts,
alcohols as they occur in sewage, petroleum products normally occurring in sewage, vegetable and animal
oils and fungus and bacteria.

The Contractor shall submit full details of the materials and their workmanship as per the manufacturer
recommendations and the Engineer’s approval. Special care shall be taken to protect the surfaces between
the manholes and the steps, inlet and outlet sewer pipes.

H.3 Installation

The seaming of concrete HDPE protective liners is carried out by extrusion welding. The installation
should only be performed by qualified and authorized installers. The following should also be ensured:

 Stud shear force is over 1800 N/stud in longitudinal and horizontal directions

 High pull-out resistance of up to 42 t/m2, and 1000 N/stud

 High mechanical bond-long lasting sealing.


The lining shall be permanently and physically attached to the concrete with an anchoring system
manufactured from the same material as the lining and shall be suitable for casting into concrete. The
anchoring system shall withstand a pull out test of at least 18kN/m applied perpendicular to the concrete
surface for a period of one minute without rupture of the anchors or withdrawal from the concrete.

Lining shall have a smooth glossy finish, be impermeable to gases and liquids and non conducive to
bacteria or fungus growth.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 82


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Lining shall be capable of being repaired at any time during the life of the structure in accordance with the
lining manufacturer’s instructions.

The lining shall be capable of withstanding a back hydrostatic pressure of 2 bars applied to the under
surface of the lining without losing anchorage and without rupture and leakage.

All lining shall be factory tested for pin holes using an electrical spark tester set at 20,000 volts minimum.
Sheets having holes shall be satisfactorily repaired in the factory prior to delivery.

END OF SECTION

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) SECTION 33 30 00 ‐ 83


SANITARY SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER UTILITIES
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE

TO THE BILL OF QUANTITIES

1 - GENERAL

1.1 The Bills of Quantities and Schedule of Rates are to be read and constructed in association with the

Specifications and Drawings, and this Method of Measurement. General directions and descriptions of

items of works given elsewhere in the Tender Documents are not generally repeated in the Bill of

Quantities.

1.2 The items of work given in the Bill of Quantities shall comply with the relevant sections of the
Specification and with the Instructions of the Engineer.

1.3 Quantities of work and materials in the Bill of Quantities are estimated only and are not to be considered
as limiting or extending the amount of work to be done and material to be supplied by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not use the quantities as an ordering schedule.

1.4 Work is measured net and geometrically as fixed in position as detailed and dimensioned on the
Drawings except where otherwise stated in a measurement rule applicable to the work, each item in
the Bill of Quantities shall be priced as indicated..

1.5 Unit rates shall be written both in words and figures in the space specified in the Bill of Quantities.

1.6 The unit rate inserted by the Tenderer / Contractor in the Bill of Quantities for any item of work shall
apply completed work confirming to the Contract Documents covering all cost of Labour, Material and
Equipment required for executing that item of work as well as covering the share of that item for the
other general cost to be incurred by the Contractor during the execution of the works. These general
cost shall include but are not restricted to the following, unless entered as a separate pay item in the
Bill of Quantities:

A. Preparation and submission of bids including the site inspection.

B. Labour, plant, tools and vehicles and all costs in connection therewith.

C. Costs related to the Contractor’s site, temporary construction including the provision of all
utilities and facilities.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 1


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

D. Work at any location or height.

E. Provision of wastage of materials and for consumable materials.

F. Cost of laboratory testing, survey work and assistance to the Engineer as required in the
Contract.

G. Duties, customs, taxes, insurance and all other related costs.


H. Cost of bank guarantees.
I. Cost of permission to use private or public land.
J. Compliance with traffic regulations.
K. Overheads and profit.
L. Maintenance of public and private roads, services and adjoining property, control of noise
and pollution, prevention of fire and compliance with all other statutory and general
obligations.
M. Co-Ordination, installation and as-built drawings and the like, reports, records, certificates,
notices, proposals, designs, details, calculations and other information required by the
Specifications.
N. All other works related to general requirements and all expenses the Contractor may
encounter in the proper execution of the Contract.

2. Symbols, Abbreviations and Definitions


2.1 The following symbols and abbreviations are used in this Method of Measurement and in the Bills
of Quantities/Schedule of Rates:

m2 = square metre

m3 = cubic metre

L.m / m = meter length

Mm = Millimetre

L.S = Lump Sum

Kg = Kilogram

No. / Nr = number

Qty = quantity

Drg = drawing

Hr = Hours

Ton = Metric Tonne

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 2


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

3. Dayworks
Dayworks will be administered strictly in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract clause 13.6

Signatures on Daywork sheets by the Project Manager, the Engineer, and/or clerk of works ...etc is merely
verification of the time spent on the work. The signature does not necessarily mean that the work will be
paid on a Daywork basis. The Project Manager is solely responsible for agreeing with the contractor a fair
value of extra work.

The contractor will be paid for Dayworks carried out during the course of the contract while other operations
are in progress, at the rates set out in this schedule. Profit and overheads are not to be included in the
actual rates but stated as percentage addition item provided for the same at the end of the labour, Plant,
and Materials sections of this Dayworks schedule.

The basic rates to be inserted in the Dayworks schedule shall be the rates, which the contractor has used
in determining his unit rates inserted elsewhere in this Tender Document.

Time engaged on the actual works only will be allowed. In the event of labour or plant having to be brought
to the site specifically for the item of Daywork, then a reasonable allowance may be made for travelling
time, any such allowance to be agreed by the Project Manager before the Day work is executed.

3.1 Lab our


The Daywork rates quoted for Labour are to be the inclusive Net amounts payable, including for use of
hand tools and waste, all ordinary non mechanical plant, staging, scaffolding, tarpaulin, use of electric light
and water for the works, etc, and all special inducements for working on this site, The rates shall also be
deemed to include the extra cost of public holidays, other holidays with pay, medical costs, bonuses, sick
leave, termination indemnity pay, Taxes, Social Insurance, and the like.

Unless specifically authorized in writing by the Project Manager, non-productive overtime or special rates
for overtime will not be admissible. The cost of all supervisory and administrative staff such as but not
limited to. Engineers, Foremen, Clerks, Storemen, Secretaries and the like, is to be included in the
percentage addition for profit and overheads.

Daywork rates quoted shall be deemed to include all Head office expenses, and all direct and indirect
costs.

Skilled labour is defined as the daywork for trades such as but not limited to shutterer, steelworker, brick /
block worker, welder, plasterer / renderer, painter, carpenter, plumber, electrician.. .etc

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 3


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Semi skilled labour is defined as the daywork for trades assistant such as but not limited to shutterer,
steelworker, brick / block worker, welder, plasterer/renderer, decorator I painter, carpenter, plumber,
electrician.. .etc

3.2 Plant
Plant Hire rates shall include for the cost of maintaining in proper working order, attendance in starting up
and shutting down, fuel, refueling, power, oils, grease, cleaning materials, replacement and / or sharpening
of tools, provision of tools and all other ancillary items, including consumable spares. Idle time in waiting or
maintenance or travelling to the site will not be considered.

Drivers and Attendants shall be charged for, at the rates laid down in the Schedule of Rates for Labour.

The reasonable cost of hiring plant and equipment shall be paid for any items not listed in the Schedule.
These costs will be based upon the Contractors Invoices. Competitive quotations must be obtained for all
Plant Hire. In the case of plant and equipment owned by the Contractor being used, a fair value, based
upon market hire rates applicable at the time, will be used.

3.3 Materials
Materials used on Daywork shall be as specified for the works. The rates are to include all costs of delivery
to the site, off-loading, handling, storing, protection, distribution to work locations on the site, and collecting,
and hauling debris resulting from its use out of the site. Should materials be required for use on Dayworks,
which are not included in the Schedule, the lowest current net market prices shall apply, plus a reasonable
allowance for collecting, loading, off-loading and transporting to the works.

4. Fixing and Building in


Unless expressly itemized separately in the Bill of Quantities, no separate measurement shall be made in
respect of items, whether specified or not, requiring: mortar; building in a fixing to blockwork, concrete,
metalwork or timber; painting and protective treatments, welding; drilling; bolting inclusive of bolts, nuts and
washers; screws, nails and plugs; jointing and joint materials; shuttering; boxing out and filling thereof;
grouting; packing; bedding; insulation between different metals, making good; conduits and fittings; cutting;
waste; labour; materials; temporary Works; construction; plant; storing; handling; and all incidental work to
the items concerned and their surroundings.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 4


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

4.1 General Requirements - Division 01

A. Separate payment shall be made for complying with the requirements of Division (01) Volume (2).

B. No separate payment shall be made for complying with the requirements of the specification Divisions
except of the items included in the Bill of Quantities.

C. No separate payment shall be made of making records of ground levels and topography; providing and
,maintaining proper markers and profile rails; supporting excavations; making good slips, falls and excess
excavations for working space or any other reason; trimming surfaces of excavations for structures; making
allowance for settlement or heave; selection of material for backfill against permanent Works; compaction
trails; compacting with hand held equipment; compaction and control of moisture content; testing;
preparation and restoration of borrow pits including removing and disposal of unsuitable surface and other
material; scarification; location marking and shaping of disposal heaps; keeping the Works and excavations
dry.

5 Potable Water and Irrigation System

5.1 Pipe Works


The supply and installation of pipes shall be measured in linear meters for each type and size of pipe
complete with all fittings, accessories, jointing, rubber gaskets and all necessary fittings.

The measurement for pipe shall be made according to the actual length of pipeline including all buried fittings,
measured along the axis of the line before backfilling.

Unless otherwise specified or covered by separate B.O.Q./Schedule of Rates measured items, the rates for
pipe supply and installation shall include, but not be limited to:

A. Supply of all pipes, rubber gaskets, jointing as required, necessary fittings, connections.

B. Supply of all labours, tools, equipment and installation.

C. Excavation of trenches for the required pipe installation depth and width, from the existing rough
grading in all types of soil. The item shall also include removing pavement, broken masonry blocks
...etc., that may obstruct excavation and protection of trenches and keeping the sides of excavation
true by struts and sheeting if necessary.

D. Supply, lay and compact bedding and surrounding materials to the required thicknesses, and laying
warning tapes at specified depth.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 5
METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

E. Laying, installing, connecting, testing and disinfecting pipes with all required joints, bends, fittings,

thrust blocks if any and special pieces with their necessary connections.

F. Backfilling and compaction of trenches up to bedding level or existing rough grading which is greater
after approval of test results and restoration of ground surface to its original condition.

G. Repair of all damaged external coatings and internal lining coating systems as specified.

H. Protection of all flanged and restrained joints, sluice valves, quick and stepped couplings, tapping

sleeves,etc., in buried conditions as specified.

I. Protection of pipes, fire and irrigation hydrants, valves, fittings,...etc., installed in concrete chambers or
as specified.

J. Supplying and install protection of all buried pipes, fittings, valves with wrapping tapes and polyethylene
sleeves as specified.

K. Cleaning, jointing, cutting, trimming and otherwise preparing the ends of pipes, 100% testing of

Pipelines after backfilling.

5.2 Gate Valves with Surface Box


Valves shall be measured in numbers for each type and size and shall be inclusive of but not be limited to:

A. A stem coupling (extension spindle coupling) standard dimensions,

B. An extension spindle extending to approximately 150 mm below the surface box cover complete
with standard protection cap and operating cap,
C. A protection tube for spindle extension made from uPVC material (including dustcap),
D. Additional hand wheel for valve operation from inside chambers,
E. The supply of bolts, nuts and washers or other approved bolt systems and rubber gaskets.
I. The installation of all valves shall be measured for each type and size and shall include for
installation of all accessories and fittings.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 6


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

5.3 Valve chambers


Valve chambers shall be measured in numbers for each type and size and shall be inclusive of but not be
limited to:
A. Excavation to required depths in any type of soil including rock, the item shall include the protection of
trenches and keeping the sides of excavation true by struts and sheeting if necessary.
B. Construction of reinforced or plain concrete works including supply, cutting and fixing steel reinforcement
and forming benching with plain concrete.
C. VSupply and paint layers of coating as specified to the external walls of chambers adjacent to the backfilling.

D. Supply and paint internally layers of coating as specified.

E. Construction of bottom slab with required slopes as per drawings


F. Supply and Installation of step irons (if required) or step rails including the step coating.
G. Supply and installation of ductile iron cover and frames of heavy-duty type.

H. Supply and installation of gate/butterfly valve, Air valve (if any) and all fittings as per drawings and
specifications.
I. The supply and install of bolts, nuts and washers or other approved bolt systems and rubber gaskets.
J. Additional hand wheel for valve operation from inside chambers,
K. Testing of valves, fittings and pipes inside the chambers, backfilling and compaction.

L. Backfilling using suitable excavated material or any suitable material from the project site, compaction and
restoration of ground surface to its original conditions.
M. Disposing of the surplus excavated material and unsuitable excavated materials off the project site.

6. Storm Water and Sewerage System


6.1 Pipelines
Pipelines shall be measured by linear meters inclusive of all fittings from the internal face of the manholes,
inspection chambers, street gully inlets, etc. The item shall include the following works as specified:
A The material supply in addition to testing as per Manufacturer's instructions, packing,
Dispatching, supply to site stores in an acceptable working condition and submittal of all relevant
certificates as per the conditions of Contract.
B Removing pavement, masonry, blocks and all types of obstructions.
C Excavation of trench to the required depth and width in all types of soil including rock.
D Leveling, protection of trenches and keeping the sides of excavation true by struts
And sheeting.
E Dewatering sub-soil water if necessary.
F Laying and joining pipes complete with the proper type of bedding.
SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 7
METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

G Supply and construct reinforced concrete surrounding at road crossing and as


Detailed in the drawings and specification.
H Testing of pipelines before backfilling.
I Backfilling, compaction and restoration of ground surface to its original conditions.
J Retesting of pipelines after complete backfilling as per Specifications.
K Pipeline cleaning.
L Retesting for gravity lines to be selected by the Engineer during the provisional
Handing over of the Project.

6.2 Manholes and Inspection Chambers


This item is measured in number; rate shall include the following works as specified for the types and
depths according to drawings, specifications and Bills of Quantities:
A. Excavation to required depths in any type of soil including rock, the item shall include the
Protection of trenches and keeping the sides of excavation true by struts and sheeting if
Necessary.
B. Construction of reinforced or plain concrete works including supply, cutting and fix

steel reinforcement and forming benching with plain concrete.

C. Supply and paint three layers of coating as specified to the external walls of manholes
Adjacent to the backfilling.
D. Supply and paint internally two layers of coating.
E. Construction of bottom benching and side slopes as per drawings
F. Supply and Installation of step irons (if required) or step rails including the step coating.
G. Supply and installation of ductile iron cover and frames of heavy / medium duty type for
Manholes and medium duty for inspection chambers
H. Testing of manholes/collection chambers, backfilling and compaction.
I. Backfilling using suitable excavated material or any suitable material from the project
Site, compaction and restoration of ground surface to its original conditions.
J. Disposing of the surplus excavated material and unsuitable excavated materials off the
Project site.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 8


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

6.3 Catch basin


This item is measured in numbers and shall include the following works as specified for
The depths as detailed:
A. Excavation to required depths in any type of soil including rock, the item shall include the
Protection of trenches and keeping the sides of excavation true by struts and sheeting if
Necessary.
B. Supply and installation of the polypropylene gully body including the GRP bucket (if
Any), fittings and all accessories as shown on the drawings and specified.
C. Supply and construction of plain concrete around the gully body including formwork as
Shown on the drawings.
D. Supply and paint three coats of damp proofing as specified to the external walls of gully.
E. Supply and installation of cast iron gully grating including frame of heavy duty type,
F. Backfilling and compaction.

7 Mechanical Work
7.1 The rates inserted against each item shall be applicable and included for the manufacturer, painting,
packing, dispatch to site and storing, complete with all various accessories as specified. Rates also
shall include for erection, setting to work and all plant requirements for these items, with all other
obligations, until the final taking over of the works.
7.2 The rates for pipes and connections shall include coating or painting also to make good damaged coating
for external protection according to specifications, constructing of supports, and anchors where
necessary.
7.3 The rates for equipment, pumps and their spare parts shall include submission of inspection
Certificates and certificates of guarantee from manufacturers.
7.4 No payment will be made pumps unless the required certificates are submitted.
7.5 Prior to placing the order for supply of any equipment, the written approval of the Engineer
Is required.
7.6 The origin and quality of equipment supplied shall be considered in the technical evaluation of the tender.
7.7 Tenderers must submit detailed, and itemized prices for every lump sum item in the Schedules.
7.8 Rates in the Bills of Quantities and Schedules of Rates shall provide for all the general

Requirements of the specification and other Contract Conditions and for the supply of every

Material and labour necessary to complete the work according to the true intent of the Contract whether

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 9


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

Such materials and labour are specially mentioned therein or not and the various rates and prices set
down against the respective schedule items shall include for the due proportion of such provision.

7.9 The rates for equipment shall as applicable include for the manufacture, painting, packing and
dispatch to the site, complete with all various accessories as specified, erection at site, setting to
work, testing and all plant requirements for these items with all other obligations until the final
taking over.
7.10 Whether spare parts are requested in accordance with the specifications or in the B.O.Q or not, the
Contractor shall submit with the operation and Maintenance Manual a list of spares as
recommended by the respective manufacturers which would be required for operating the equipment
for a period of two (2) years on completion of the Defects Liability Period.
Each item in the list shall be priced and the Employer retains the option of purchasing a part or all of
the spares thus recommended by the Contractor. In addition, Contractor shall provide special tool
lists, equipment, and accessories required to install or maintain the equipment specified in different
division of these specifications.
7.11 Metal label shall be attached to each piece of spare parts giving a suitable description for
easy identification at site.
7.12 The spare parts shall be adequately protected and collectively packed in suitable
containers and shall be complete with four copies of details schedules.

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) Section ‐‐‐‐ ‐ 10


METHODS OF MEASUREMENT PREAMBLE
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS:

A) Motors:

1. General Electric (U.S.A)


2. Westinghouse (U.S.A)
3. U. S. Electric Motors (U.S.A)
4. Siemens (Germany)
5. ABS (Germany)
6. Danfoss (Denmark)
7. ABB (Swiss)

B) Sleeves:

Locally Fabricated Similar To:


1. F & S Manufacturing Co. (U.S.A.)
2. B – Line (U.S.A.)
3. Grinnell Corp. (U.S.A.)
(U.S.A.)

PAINTING

1. Hempel (Denmark)
2. Forter (U.S.A.)
3. Jotun (Egypt)
4. ‫ﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺙ‬ (Egypt)

INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

1. Aschroft (U.S.A.)
2. Weksler (U.S.A.)
3. Weiss (U.S.A.)

MOUNTING AND ISOLATION OF MECH. PLUMBING SYSTEMS:

1. Tyler Pipe Corporation (U.S.A)


2. Grinnell Corporation (U.S.A.)
3. F & S Manufacturing Co. (U.S.A.)
4. Mason (U.S.A.)
5. B – Line (U.S.A.)

PIPING AND FITTING MATERIALS:

A) Ductile Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings:

1. Tyler Pipe Corporation (U.S.A)


2. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry Comp. (U.S.A)
3. Glynwed Ensign (U.K.)
4. Pont – A – Mousson (France)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS - 1


‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

5. Greater Cairo Foundries (GCF) (Egypt)


6. El-Nasr costing company (Egypt)
7. TAWAKOL (Egypt)
8. ELMOHANDS (Egypt)
9. El morsy (Egypt)

B) Polypropylene Pipe & Fittings:

1. Aquatherm (Germany)
2. Banninger Reiskirchen (B.R.).
3. Roxy

C) Solvent Drainage Fittings:

1. G.M. (Egypt)
2. NIBCO (U.S.A.)

D) UPVC Piping & Fittings :

1. Geberit (Swiss)
2. Roxy . (Egypt)
3. Hunter (U.K.)
4. Terrain (U.K.)
5. Masr El-Hegaz company (Egypt)
6. PPP company (Egypt)
7. Dubai Plast (16PN) (Emirate)
8. Seif (Egypt)
9. RSP (Egypt)
10. El-Shideed (Egypt)
11. First (Egypt)
12. G.M. (Egypt)
13. El Sherif (Egypt)
14. Masr El-Nour company (Egypt)
15. Al HANDSIA (Egypt)
Or approved Equal

E) HDPE Piping & Fittings :

1. Geberit (Swiss)
2. Roxy. (Egypt)
3. George Fesher (Swiss)
4. Standard Pipes Protection Co. (U.S.A.)
5. PPP (Egypt)
6. Misr El Hegaz (Egypt)
7. Al Rowad (Egypt)
8. New Mina Plast (Egypt)
9. Hebish (Egypt)
10. Al-munif Pipes(MMP) (KSA)
11. RSP (Egypt)
Or approved Equal

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS - 2


‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

F) Concreted Pipes :

1. Osman Group (Egypt)


2. N.P.C. (Egypt)
Or approved Equal

G) VC (Verified Clay) Pipes :

1. Sweillem (Egypt)
Or approved Equal

VALVES:
1. NIBCO (U.S.A.)
2. Watts Regulator Co. (U.S.A.)
3. Crane Co. (U.K.)
4. Hattersly (U.K.)
5. Bamix (Belgium)
6. Weflo (U.K.)
7. DVD (Turkey)
8. ENZO RODI (Germany)
9. Sierra (Egypt)
10. Tecofi (French)
Or approved Equal

INSULATION:

1. Johns – Manville Corp. (U.S.A.)


2. Owens – Corning Fiberglass Corp. (U.S.A.)
3. Certain – Teed Mfg. Co. (U.S.A.)
4. Izocam (Turkey)
Or approved Equal

SEWAGE AND STORM WATER SYSTEMS:

A) Manhole and valve chamber Cover , Ladder and special pieces


1. Tawakol metal industries. (Egypt)
2. El Ekhlas Foundry (Egypt)
3. AL-AHRAM (Egypt)
4. EL-MOHANDS (Egypt)
5. SOLIDO (Egypt)
6. AL MASRYA (MATRIX) (Egypt)

Or approved Equal

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS - 3


‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

WATER PUMPS:
1. Crane Pump (Netherland)
2. Welo Pump (Germany)
3. Paco Pump. (U.S.A)
4. Grundfos Pump. (Denmark)
5. Flygt Pumps. (Sweden)
6. Sulzar Pump. (EU)
7. KSB Pump. (Germany)
8. HOMA Pump. (Germany)
9. ABS Pump. (Germany)
10. Ruhr Pump. (Germany)
11. Goulds. (EU)
Or approved Equal

FIRE PUMPS:

1. Peerless Pump Co. (U.S.A)


2. Ruhr Pump. (Mexico)
3. Armstrong Ltd. Co. (U.K.)
4. Patterson Pump Co. (U.S.A)
Or approved Equal

Control Panels
1. Firetroll (U.S.A.)
2. Joslyn Clark (U.S.A.)
3. Metron (U.S.A.)
4. Master (U.S.A.)
Or Approved Equal.

FIRE PUMPS DRIVERS:

1. Clark. (U.S.A)
Or Approved Equal.

FIRE HYDRANT
1. Elkhart (U.S.A.)
2. Potter Roemer (U.S.A.)
3. Angus (U.K.)
4. United engineering services (Egypt)
5. EZULA (Canada)
6. Weflo (U.K.)
7. Grinnell (U.S.A)
8. SFFECO (Emirates)
9. Naffco (Emirates)
10. Mueller (U.S.A)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS - 4


‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﻜﻨﺪﺭﻳﺔ‬

11. Kidde (U.S.A)


Or approved Equal

INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

1. Aschroft (U.S.A.)
2. Weksler (U.S.A.)
3. Weiss (U.S.A.)
4. Siemens (GERMANY)
5. ABB (Switzerland)
6. Endress + Hauser (Switzerland)

SEP., 2022 Rev. (0) LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS - 5

You might also like